1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
176 by the \SpecialChar LyX
181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
183 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
184 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
185 Documentation mailing list:
186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
188 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \begin_inset Note Note
211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
212 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
213 \begin_inset Newline newline
218 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
226 \begin_layout Standard
227 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
228 LatexCommand tableofcontents
235 \begin_layout Chapter
239 \begin_layout Section
240 What is \SpecialChar LyX
244 \begin_layout Standard
246 is a document preparation system.
247 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
248 scripts, publishable books, business
249 letters and proposals,
250 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
254 It is unlike most other
255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
264 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
280 pt type, left justified, 5
281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
290 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
294 \begin_layout Standard
295 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
300 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
304 \begin_layout Standard
309 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
310 's philosophy: most importantly,
311 the format of all of the manuals.
312 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
313 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
314 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
317 \begin_layout Section
322 \begin_layout Standard
323 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
324 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
326 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
327 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
331 \begin_layout Standard
332 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
333 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
334 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
336 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
337 only a vertical scrollbar.
340 \begin_layout Standard
341 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
342 The first case is large images.
343 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
344 the image and use the option
355 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
358 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
361 \begin_layout Standard
362 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
363 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
371 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
378 \begin_layout Section
382 \begin_layout Standard
383 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
385 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
387 Just select the manual you want to read from the
394 \begin_layout Section
395 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
399 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
406 \begin_layout Standard
407 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
408 can be configured via the menu
410 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
414 \begin_inset Index idx
417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
424 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
426 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
427 packages are available.
428 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
430 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
431 was installed on your system,
432 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
437 \begin_inset space \space{}
440 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
441 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
443 To force \SpecialChar LyX
444 to re-inspect your system use
446 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
450 \begin_inset Index idx
453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
454 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
460 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
461 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
464 \begin_layout Section
467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
469 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
476 \begin_layout Standard
477 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
478 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 installed but you will not be
481 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
482 or print your documents
486 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
487 Some \SpecialChar LyX
488 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
497 which can produce PDFs and the like.
500 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
502 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
505 every \SpecialChar LyX
506 document can still be output as plain text
507 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
513 \begin_layout Standard
514 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
520 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
521 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
524 \begin_layout Standard
525 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
526 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
527 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
530 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
538 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
539 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
546 \begin_inset Index idx
549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
558 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
565 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
569 \begin_layout Chapter
570 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
574 \begin_layout Section
575 Basic File Operations
576 \begin_inset Index idx
579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
588 \begin_layout Standard
593 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
594 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
597 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
635 arg "buffer-new-template"
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
675 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
689 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
705 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
715 \begin_layout Itemize
737 \begin_layout Itemize
749 arg "buffer-write-as"
753 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
757 \begin_layout Itemize
759 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
775 \begin_layout Itemize
789 \begin_layout Itemize
803 \begin_layout Standard
804 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
805 few minor differences.
808 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
819 command lists the available templates.
820 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
821 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
822 and possibly propose text fragments
824 for the document, features
825 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
828 you would otherwise need to
829 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
831 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
835 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
839 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
847 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
853 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
854 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
858 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
866 \begin_layout Standard
867 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
899 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
900 to open a file or create a new one, that big
901 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
905 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
909 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
920 \begin_layout Standard
942 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
944 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
947 people work on the same document at the same time.
951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
952 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
955 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
960 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
961 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
963 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
965 \begin_inset Flex Emph
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
971 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
980 \begin_inset Flex Emph
983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
985 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
993 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1008 \begin_inset space ~
1013 will reload the document from disk.
1014 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1015 and want to restore it to the last save
1016 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1028 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1029 them as your changes.
1032 \begin_layout Section
1033 Basic Editing Features
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1046 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1053 \begin_layout Standard
1054 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1055 can perform cut and paste operations
1056 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1057 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1058 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1059 editing features and how to access
1061 We will start with cut and paste.
1064 \begin_layout Standard
1065 As you might expect, the
1069 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1070 various other editing features.
1071 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1075 \begin_layout Itemize
1081 \begin_inset Index idx
1084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1113 \begin_layout Itemize
1119 \begin_inset Index idx
1122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1151 \begin_layout Itemize
1157 \begin_inset Index idx
1160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1185 \begin_layout Itemize
1189 \begin_inset space ~
1195 \begin_layout Itemize
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1205 \begin_layout Itemize
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1219 \begin_inset Index idx
1222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1231 \begin_inset Index idx
1234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1249 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1259 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1265 \begin_layout Standard
1266 The first three are self-explanatory.
1267 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1268 and other programs using
1289 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1290 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1295 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1296 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1297 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1298 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1299 into individual cells.
1303 \begin_inset space ~
1308 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1309 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1313 \begin_layout Standard
1317 \begin_inset space ~
1322 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1324 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1326 \begin_inset space ~
1333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1339 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1340 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1341 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1347 \begin_inset space \space{}
1350 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1351 text which is often meaningless.)
1354 \begin_layout Standard
1358 \begin_inset space ~
1361 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1363 \begin_inset space ~
1367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1380 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1381 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1382 is inserted as one paragraph.
1383 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1387 \begin_inset space ~
1392 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1393 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1399 \begin_inset space ~
1402 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1408 \begin_inset space ~
1416 \begin_inset space ~
1419 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1422 paste from the primary selection.
1423 This is normally the currently selected text.
1426 \begin_layout Standard
1429 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1431 \begin_inset space ~
1435 \begin_inset space ~
1443 \begin_inset space ~
1447 \begin_inset space ~
1453 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1459 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1462 \begin_inset space ~
1471 \begin_inset space ~
1476 button to skip the curren
1477 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1481 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1488 \begin_inset space ~
1493 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1497 \begin_inset space ~
1502 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1504 If the toggle is set, searching for
1505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1516 will not match the word
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 Match whole words only
1533 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1534 to only find complete words, e.
1535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1539 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1568 also offers an advanced
1571 \begin_inset space ~
1575 \begin_inset space ~
1580 feature that is described in section
1581 \begin_inset space ~
1585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1587 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1594 \begin_layout Standard
1595 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1596 \begin_inset space \space{}
1600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1608 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1610 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1615 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1622 \begin_layout Standard
1626 arg "inset-select-all"
1629 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1630 When the cursor is inside an inset
1633 arg "inset-select-all"
1636 selects the content of the inset.
1640 arg "inset-select-all"
1643 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1644 then to the whole document.
1648 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1651 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1655 \begin_layout Section
1657 \begin_inset Index idx
1660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1667 \begin_inset Index idx
1670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1679 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1686 \begin_layout Standard
1687 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1689 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1692 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1695 or the toolbar button
1702 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1704 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 or the toolbar button
1714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1721 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1725 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1728 \begin_layout Standard
1729 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1738 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1739 This is a consequence of the 100
1740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1743 step undo limit mentioned above.
1746 \begin_layout Standard
1755 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1757 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1761 \begin_layout Section
1763 \begin_inset Index idx
1766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1775 \begin_layout Standard
1776 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1779 \begin_layout Enumerate
1784 \begin_layout Itemize
1789 once anywhere in the edit window.
1790 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1794 \begin_layout Enumerate
1799 \begin_layout Itemize
1806 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1809 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1812 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1813 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1815 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1816 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1822 \begin_layout Itemize
1823 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1826 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1833 \begin_layout Enumerate
1834 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1838 \begin_layout Standard
1839 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1840 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1844 \begin_layout Section
1846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1848 name "sec:Navigating"
1853 \begin_inset Index idx
1856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1865 \begin_layout Standard
1867 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1870 \begin_layout Itemize
1875 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1876 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1879 \begin_layout Itemize
1880 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1882 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1884 \begin_inset space ~
1889 or by the toolbar button
1892 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1898 \begin_layout Itemize
1899 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1901 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1904 and use the same menu to return to them.
1905 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1908 \begin_layout Standard
1912 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1917 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1918 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1920 \begin_inset space ~
1925 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1926 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1927 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1928 last editing position.
1931 \begin_layout Standard
1936 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1940 \begin_layout Subsection
1942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1944 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1949 \begin_inset Index idx
1952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1953 Navigating ! Outline
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1972 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
1973 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
1974 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
1975 \begin_inset space ~
1979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1981 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1985 ), notes, or citations (see section
1986 \begin_inset space ~
1990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1992 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1997 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2001 \begin_layout Standard
2002 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2003 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2004 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2005 dialog and to modify the citation.
2008 \begin_layout Standard
2013 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2014 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2016 Labels and References
2018 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2027 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2032 control the display.
2037 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2038 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2043 option keeps it in the current view state.
2044 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2048 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2049 \begin_inset space ~
2052 3, the subsections of sections
2053 \begin_inset space ~
2056 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2061 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2066 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2076 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2079 \begin_layout Standard
2086 button refreshes the TOC (
2087 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2089 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2093 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2095 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2099 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2103 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2107 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2111 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2113 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2117 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2119 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2123 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2125 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2129 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2133 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2135 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2139 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2143 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2147 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2151 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2155 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2159 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2163 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2167 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2169 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2173 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2187 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2188 For example, you can move section
2189 \begin_inset space ~
2193 \begin_inset space ~
2196 2.4 or after section
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2202 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2215 (or the corresponding key bindings
2223 ) you can change the level of sections.
2224 You can make section
2225 \begin_inset space ~
2229 \begin_inset space ~
2233 \begin_inset space ~
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2240 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2241 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2244 \begin_layout Subsection
2245 Horizontal Scrolling
2246 \begin_inset Index idx
2249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2250 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2260 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2262 \begin_inset space ~
2265 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2266 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2267 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2271 \begin_layout Standard
2272 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2276 \begin_layout Itemize
2278 is used on a small tablet computer
2281 \begin_layout Itemize
2282 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2307 \begin_layout Itemize
2308 Math constructs with long command names
2311 \begin_layout Standard
2312 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2313 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2315 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2316 window so that table
2317 \begin_inset space ~
2321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2323 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2328 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2330 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2331 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2334 \begin_layout Standard
2335 \begin_inset Float table
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2348 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2352 Horizontal scrolling test.
2360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_inset Tabular
2363 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2364 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2365 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2366 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2367 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2409 \begin_layout Section
2410 Input/Word Completion
2411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2413 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2418 \begin_inset Index idx
2421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2428 \begin_inset Index idx
2431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2462 \begin_layout Standard
2464 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2466 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2467 is used to propose completions.
2470 \begin_layout Standard
2471 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2479 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset space ~
2495 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2499 \begin_inset space ~
2504 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2505 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2509 \begin_inset space ~
2515 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2516 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2517 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2518 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2521 \begin_layout Standard
2523 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2524 completions available.
2529 key to accept a proposed completion.
2530 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2531 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2532 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2535 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2542 \begin_layout Standard
2543 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2544 ing options for text.
2546 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2548 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2550 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2553 he special math option
2557 enables characters to be composed.
2559 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2561 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2565 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2568 you want to insert the character
2569 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2573 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2576 input the characters
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2591 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2595 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2597 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2602 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2604 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2607 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2610 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2612 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2615 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2620 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2622 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2626 's installation folder.
2628 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2629 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2636 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2641 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2642 In the example above,
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2679 \begin_layout Section
2681 \begin_inset Index idx
2684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2691 \begin_inset Index idx
2694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2723 \begin_inset Index idx
2726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2757 \begin_layout Standard
2758 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2772 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2775 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2779 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2780 \begin_inset space ~
2784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2786 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2797 \begin_inset space ~
2805 \begin_inset space ~
2826 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2830 \begin_layout Labeling
2831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2835 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2836 LatexCommand nomenclature
2838 description "Tabulator key"
2845 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2847 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2854 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2861 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2865 , especially section
2866 \begin_inset space ~
2870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2872 reference "subsec:Lists"
2878 If you are still confused, look in the
2883 \begin_inset Newline newline
2891 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2892 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2896 \begin_layout Labeling
2897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2901 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2902 LatexCommand nomenclature
2904 description "Escape key"
2912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2919 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2920 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2923 \begin_layout Labeling
2924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2929 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2930 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2934 \begin_layout Standard
2935 There are three modifier keys:
2938 \begin_layout Labeling
2939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2957 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2958 LatexCommand nomenclature
2960 description "Control key"
2965 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
2966 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2970 \begin_layout Itemize
2979 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2982 \begin_layout Itemize
2991 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2994 \begin_layout Itemize
3003 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3007 \begin_layout Labeling
3008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3026 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3027 LatexCommand nomenclature
3029 description "Shift key"
3034 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3035 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3038 \begin_layout Labeling
3039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3057 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3058 LatexCommand nomenclature
3060 description "Alt or Meta key"
3065 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3066 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3067 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3073 \begin_inset Newline newline
3076 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3078 menu accelerator keys
3081 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3082 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3086 \begin_layout Standard
3087 For example, the sequence
3088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3094 \begin_inset space ~
3098 \begin_inset space ~
3104 \begin_inset space ~
3112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3131 \begin_inset space ~
3137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3147 \begin_layout Standard
3152 manual lists all other things bound to the
3160 \begin_layout Standard
3161 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3163 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3165 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3166 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3168 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3169 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3170 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3172 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3188 followed by a capital
3195 \begin_layout Chapter
3198 \begin_inset Index idx
3201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3211 \begin_layout Section
3213 \begin_inset Index idx
3216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3225 \begin_layout Subsection
3229 \begin_layout Standard
3230 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3231 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3232 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3233 numbering schemes, and so on.
3234 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3235 and format the title of your document differently.
3238 \begin_layout Standard
3243 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3244 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3245 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3246 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3247 picks one for you by default.
3248 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3251 \begin_layout Subsection
3253 \begin_inset Index idx
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3265 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3272 \begin_layout Standard
3273 You can select a class using the
3275 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3276 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3280 \begin_inset Index idx
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3290 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3294 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3298 \begin_layout Standard
3299 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3304 \begin_layout Description
3305 Article for basic articles
3308 \begin_layout Description
3309 Report for basic reports
3312 \begin_layout Description
3313 Book for writing a book
3316 \begin_layout Description
3317 Letter for US-style letters
3320 \begin_layout Standard
3321 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3322 only uses if you have installed
3323 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3324 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3325 distributions will include
3327 Here are some of the classes.
3328 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3330 Special Document Classes
3339 \begin_layout Description
3340 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3343 \begin_layout Description
3344 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3348 \begin_layout Description
3349 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3353 \begin_layout Description
3354 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3355 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3356 There are three article layouts available.
3357 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3358 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3359 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3360 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3365 sequential numbering
3366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3370 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3371 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3372 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3375 \begin_layout Description
3376 Beamer Layout for presentations
3379 \begin_layout Description
3380 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3381 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3382 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3383 with \SpecialChar LyX
3387 \begin_layout Description
3388 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3391 \begin_layout Description
3393 \begin_inset space ~
3396 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3399 \begin_layout Description
3400 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3403 \begin_layout Description
3404 Foils Used to make transparencies
3407 \begin_layout Description
3408 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3409 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3410 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3411 with \SpecialChar LyX
3415 \begin_layout Description
3416 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3417 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3420 \begin_layout Description
3421 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3424 \begin_layout Description
3425 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3428 \begin_layout Description
3429 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3430 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3431 (Is used by this document.)
3434 \begin_layout Description
3435 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3438 \begin_layout Description
3439 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3442 \begin_layout Description
3447 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3448 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3450 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3454 \begin_layout Description
3455 Slides Used to make transparencies
3458 \begin_layout Description
3460 \begin_inset space ~
3463 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3464 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3467 \begin_layout Description
3468 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3471 \begin_layout Standard
3472 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3474 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3476 Special Document Classes
3483 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3484 of the document classes.
3487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3491 \begin_layout Standard
3492 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3495 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3497 \begin_inset Index idx
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3517 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3518 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3520 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3523 \begin_layout Standard
3526 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3531 , are highly specialized.
3533 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3534 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3535 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3536 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3537 by some document class.
3538 There are just too many of them.
3539 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3542 \begin_layout Standard
3543 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3551 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3552 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3553 document class for a new file.
3555 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3558 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3565 manual for information on how to install them.
3566 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3572 \begin_layout Standard
3573 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3574 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3575 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3576 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3577 class files to be used for dissertation
3578 s submitted to those universities.
3579 The \SpecialChar LyX
3580 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3582 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3586 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3592 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3599 name "subsec:Modules"
3604 \begin_inset Index idx
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 \begin_layout Standard
3617 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3618 chosen document class.
3619 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3620 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3631 \begin_inset Index idx
3634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3645 \begin_layout Standard
3646 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3647 packages or file format converters that are not always
3648 installed by default.
3650 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3651 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3652 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3653 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3655 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3656 file without the missing prerequisites.
3657 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3658 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3665 \begin_inset Index idx
3668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3669 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3676 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3680 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3684 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3693 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3695 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3706 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3709 \begin_layout Standard
3710 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3718 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3720 will advise you about these things.
3728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3732 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3737 \begin_inset Index idx
3740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3741 Document ! Local Layout
3749 \begin_layout Standard
3750 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3751 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3752 : They are intended to be used in
3753 a variety of different documents.
3754 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3755 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3756 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3757 need a specific inset or
3758 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3760 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3763 style only that one time.
3764 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3766 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3784 manual for information on how to use it.
3787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3791 \begin_layout Standard
3792 Each class has a default set of options.
3793 Here's a quick table describing them:
3796 \begin_layout Standard
3797 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3803 \begin_layout Standard
3805 \begin_inset Tabular
3806 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3807 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3812 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4273 \begin_layout Standard
4274 You're probably also wondering what
4275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4279 \begin_inset space ~
4283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4287 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4288 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4293 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4298 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4308 headings, there are also
4316 headings, and so on.
4317 We will describe these headings fully in section
4318 \begin_inset space ~
4322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4324 reference "subsec:Headings"
4331 \begin_layout Subsection
4333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4335 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 \begin_inset Index idx
4353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4372 \begin_inset space ~
4380 \begin_inset space ~
4385 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4387 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4388 doesn't support special options you want to
4389 use for your document.
4390 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4391 -class and its options, you have to read
4395 \begin_layout Standard
4397 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4401 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4405 \begin_inset space ~
4412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4418 \begin_inset space ~
4423 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4424 You can choose between the following five options:
4427 \begin_layout Labeling
4428 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4433 Use default page style of current class.
4436 \begin_layout Labeling
4437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4442 No page numbers or headings.
4445 \begin_layout Labeling
4446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4454 \begin_layout Labeling
4455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4460 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4461 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4462 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4463 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4466 \begin_layout Labeling
4467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4472 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4473 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4490 How they are defined is explained in section
4491 \begin_inset space ~
4495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4497 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4505 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4506 \begin_inset space ~
4510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4512 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4519 \begin_layout Subsection
4520 Paper Size and Orientation
4521 \begin_inset Index idx
4524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4525 Document ! Paper size
4531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4533 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4540 \begin_layout Standard
4541 You can find the following options in the menu
4544 \begin_inset space ~
4551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4555 \begin_inset Index idx
4558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4567 \begin_layout Labeling
4568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4572 \begin_inset space ~
4577 What size paper to print on.
4582 \begin_layout Itemize
4588 \begin_layout Itemize
4594 \begin_layout Itemize
4600 \begin_layout Itemize
4606 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 US letter, US legal, US executive
4612 \begin_layout Itemize
4618 \begin_layout Itemize
4625 \begin_layout Labeling
4626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4631 To choose whether to output as
4642 \begin_layout Labeling
4643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4647 \begin_inset space ~
4652 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4653 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4656 \begin_layout Subsection
4658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4660 name "subsec:Margins"
4665 \begin_inset Index idx
4668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4675 \begin_inset Index idx
4678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 Paper margins are set in the menu
4690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4694 \begin_inset Index idx
4697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4706 \begin_layout Standard
4707 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4708 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4709 the paper format and the font size into account.
4712 \begin_layout Subsection
4716 \begin_layout Standard
4717 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4718 has to convert everything into the new
4720 That includes the paragraph environments.
4721 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4722 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4723 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4725 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4734 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4736 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4737 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4738 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4741 \begin_layout Section
4742 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4743 \begin_inset Index idx
4746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4747 Paragraph ! Indentation
4755 \begin_layout Subsection
4757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4759 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4766 \begin_layout Standard
4767 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4768 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4771 \begin_layout Standard
4772 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4773 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4774 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4775 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4779 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4785 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4786 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4787 language than English.
4789 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4792 \begin_layout Standard
4793 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4794 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4795 into \SpecialChar LyX
4797 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4800 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4802 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4803 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4804 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4811 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4812 goes to produce a printable file.
4817 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4819 gives you the ability globally to change
4823 these pre-coded spacings.
4824 We will explain more later.
4827 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 Paragraph Separation
4829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4831 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4840 Paragraph ! Separation
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4856 \begin_inset space ~
4864 \begin_inset space ~
4871 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4875 \begin_inset Index idx
4878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4884 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4887 \begin_layout Subsection
4891 \begin_layout Standard
4892 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4897 \begin_inset space ~
4902 dialog and toggle the
4905 \begin_inset space ~
4910 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4913 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4917 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4918 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4922 \begin_layout Standard
4923 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4924 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4927 \begin_layout Subsection
4929 \begin_inset Index idx
4932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4933 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4941 \begin_layout Standard
4944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4948 \begin_inset Index idx
4951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4960 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4964 \begin_inset space ~
4973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4974 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4980 \begin_inset Index idx
4983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4990 installed to use this feature.
4995 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4997 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4999 \begin_inset space ~
5004 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5005 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5008 \begin_layout Section
5009 Paragraph Environments
5010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5012 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5017 \begin_inset Index idx
5020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5021 Paragraph ! Environments
5027 \begin_inset Index idx
5030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5031 Paragraph environments|(
5039 \begin_layout Subsection
5043 \begin_layout Standard
5044 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5056 } \SpecialChar ldots
5066 \begin_inset Newline newline
5069 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5071 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5072 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5073 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5082 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5085 \begin_layout Standard
5086 A paragraph environment is simply a
5087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5094 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5095 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5096 scheme, labels, and so on.
5097 Additionally, you can
5098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5105 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5106 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5107 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5108 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5110 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5112 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5115 \begin_layout Standard
5116 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5117 \begin_inset Graphics
5118 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5124 at the left end of the toolbar.
5126 will change the environment of the
5130 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5131 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5132 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5135 \begin_layout Standard
5144 create a new paragraph using the
5148 paragraph environment.
5150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5157 because if you are in one of these environments:
5160 \begin_layout Itemize
5166 \begin_layout Itemize
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5178 \begin_layout Itemize
5184 \begin_layout Itemize
5190 \begin_layout Itemize
5196 \begin_layout Itemize
5202 \begin_layout Standard
5204 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5208 , rather than resetting it to
5213 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5214 \begin_inset space ~
5218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5220 reference "sec:Nesting"
5227 \begin_layout Subsection
5231 \begin_layout Standard
5232 The default paragraph environment is
5237 It creates a plain paragraph.
5239 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5240 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5241 this manual) are in the
5248 \begin_layout Standard
5249 You can nest a paragraph using the
5253 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5261 \begin_layout Subsection
5263 \begin_inset Index idx
5266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5275 \begin_layout Standard
5276 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5277 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5286 for thanks or contact information.
5287 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5288 places all of this on a separate page
5289 along with today's date.
5290 For other types of documents, the title
5291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5298 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5301 \begin_layout Standard
5303 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5317 Here's how you use them:
5320 \begin_layout Itemize
5321 Put the title of your document in the
5328 \begin_layout Itemize
5329 Put the author name in the
5336 \begin_layout Itemize
5337 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5338 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5344 Note that using this environment is optional.
5345 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5346 will automatically insert today's date.
5347 If you don't want a date, use the option
5349 Suppress default date on front page
5353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5356 \begin_inset space ~
5364 \begin_layout Standard
5365 You can use footnotes to insert
5366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 or contact information.
5376 \begin_layout Subsection
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5390 name "subsec:Headings"
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5398 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5400 takes care of the numbering for you.
5403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5405 \begin_inset Index idx
5408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5409 Section headings ! Numbered
5417 \begin_layout Standard
5418 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5422 \begin_layout Enumerate
5428 \begin_layout Enumerate
5434 \begin_layout Enumerate
5440 \begin_layout Enumerate
5446 \begin_layout Enumerate
5452 \begin_layout Enumerate
5458 \begin_layout Enumerate
5464 \begin_layout Standard
5466 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5467 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5468 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5469 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5471 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5473 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5481 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5482 You group the book into chapters.
5484 does a similar grouping:
5487 \begin_layout Itemize
5492 is divided into either
5503 \begin_layout Itemize
5515 \begin_layout Itemize
5527 \begin_layout Itemize
5539 \begin_layout Itemize
5551 \begin_layout Itemize
5563 \begin_layout Standard
5564 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 Not all document types use the
5576 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5581 is the top-level heading.
5589 \begin_layout Standard
5594 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5595 labels it with its number,
5596 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5598 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5612 \begin_inset Index idx
5615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5625 The unnumbered section headings have a
5626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5633 at the end of their name.
5634 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5635 the table of contents, see section
5636 \begin_inset space ~
5640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5649 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5650 Changing the Numbering
5651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5653 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5660 \begin_layout Standard
5661 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5662 in the Table of Contents.
5663 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5665 Just as certain classes start with
5679 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5689 This is something you can change.
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5699 \begin_inset Index idx
5702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5711 \begin_inset space ~
5715 \begin_inset space ~
5720 you will see two counters.
5725 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5726 numbers a section heading.
5727 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5732 Short Titles of Headings
5733 \begin_inset Index idx
5736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5737 Section headings ! Short titles
5743 \begin_inset Argument 1
5746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5755 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5762 \begin_layout Standard
5763 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5764 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5765 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5766 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5769 \begin_layout Standard
5771 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5772 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5773 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5774 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5779 \begin_inset space ~
5785 This will insert a box labeled
5786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5797 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5798 This also works for captions inside floats.
5799 There can only be one short title per title.
5802 \begin_layout Standard
5803 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5806 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5810 \begin_layout Standard
5811 The following information applies to all section headings:
5814 \begin_layout Itemize
5815 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5822 \begin_layout Itemize
5823 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5830 \begin_layout Subsection
5834 \begin_layout Standard
5836 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5850 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5851 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5852 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5853 the text they contain.
5854 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5862 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5865 \begin_layout Standard
5866 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5875 when you start a new paragraph.
5876 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5880 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5881 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5882 have to change back to the
5886 environment yourself.
5889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5898 \begin_inset Index idx
5901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5912 time for the differences.
5921 are identical except for one difference:
5925 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5934 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5937 \begin_layout Standard
5938 Here's an example of the
5951 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5953 See – no indentation!
5957 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5958 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5959 the other paragraph.
5962 \begin_layout Standard
5963 Here's another example, this time in the
5970 \begin_layout Quotation
5976 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5977 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5978 the first line, then
5982 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5986 you were quoting other text.
5989 \begin_layout Quotation
5990 Here's a new paragraph.
5991 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5992 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5995 \begin_layout Standard
5996 As the examples show,
6000 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6001 They should put quotes in the
6006 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6010 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6013 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6015 \begin_inset Index idx
6018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6025 \begin_inset Index idx
6028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6044 \begin_layout Standard
6049 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6055 \begin_inset Newline newline
6058 Which I did not rehearse!
6062 It could be much worse.
6063 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6065 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6066 indented a bit more than the first.
6067 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6073 \begin_inset Newline newline
6076 And make things look fine
6077 \begin_inset Newline newline
6083 arg "newline-insert newline"
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6094 does not indent both margins.
6095 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6096 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6099 arg "newline-insert newline"
6105 \begin_layout Subsection
6107 \begin_inset Index idx
6110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6126 \begin_layout Standard
6128 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6138 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6139 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6148 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6149 lets you provide your own label.
6150 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6151 describing some general features of all four of them.
6154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6158 \begin_layout Standard
6159 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6161 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6162 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6171 reset the environment to
6175 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6176 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6177 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6181 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6185 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6193 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6194 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6195 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6197 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6198 you read all of section
6199 \begin_inset space ~
6203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6205 reference "sec:Nesting"
6212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6214 \begin_inset Index idx
6217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6234 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6238 paragraph environment.
6239 It has the following properties:
6242 \begin_layout Itemize
6243 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6247 \begin_layout Itemize
6249 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6252 \begin_layout Itemize
6253 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6257 \begin_layout Itemize
6258 The items can have any length.
6260 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6261 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6268 \begin_layout Itemize
6273 environment inside another
6277 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6281 \begin_layout Itemize
6282 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6285 \begin_layout Itemize
6287 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6290 \begin_layout Itemize
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6298 reference "sec:Nesting"
6302 for a full explanation of nesting.
6306 \begin_layout Standard
6307 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6316 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6319 \begin_layout Standard
6320 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6321 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6324 \begin_layout Itemize
6325 The label for the first level
6329 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6333 \begin_layout Itemize
6334 The label for the second level is a dash.
6338 \begin_layout Itemize
6339 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6343 \begin_layout Itemize
6344 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6348 \begin_layout Itemize
6349 Back out to the third level.
6353 \begin_layout Itemize
6354 Back to the second level.
6358 \begin_layout Itemize
6359 Back to the outermost level.
6362 \begin_layout Standard
6363 These are the default labels for an
6368 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6370 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6373 dialog in the submenu
6378 \begin_inset Index idx
6381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6387 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_layout Standard
6392 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6393 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6395 \begin_inset space ~
6399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6401 reference "sec:Nesting"
6408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6410 \begin_inset Index idx
6413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6422 name "sec:Enumerate"
6429 \begin_layout Standard
6434 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6435 It has these properties:
6438 \begin_layout Enumerate
6439 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6443 \begin_layout Enumerate
6444 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6448 \begin_layout Enumerate
6450 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6453 \begin_layout Enumerate
6458 environment resets the counter to one.
6461 \begin_layout Enumerate
6474 \begin_layout Enumerate
6475 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6476 Items can have any length.
6479 \begin_layout Enumerate
6480 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6483 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6487 \begin_layout Enumerate
6488 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6492 \begin_layout Standard
6501 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6503 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6504 labels the four different levels in an
6511 \begin_layout Enumerate
6512 The first level of an
6516 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6520 \begin_layout Enumerate
6521 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6525 \begin_layout Enumerate
6526 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6530 \begin_layout Enumerate
6531 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6534 \begin_layout Enumerate
6535 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6540 \begin_layout Enumerate
6541 Back to the third level
6545 \begin_layout Enumerate
6546 Back to the second level.
6550 \begin_layout Enumerate
6551 Back to the outermost level.
6554 \begin_layout Standard
6555 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6559 environment, see section
6560 \begin_inset space ~
6564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6566 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6571 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6575 \begin_layout Standard
6576 There is more to nesting
6580 environments than we've stated here.
6581 You should read section
6582 \begin_inset space ~
6586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6588 reference "sec:Nesting"
6592 to learn more about nesting.
6595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6597 \begin_inset Index idx
6600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6609 \begin_layout Standard
6610 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6614 list has no fixed label.
6615 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6624 of the first line as the label.
6628 \begin_layout Description
6629 Example: This is an example of the
6636 \begin_layout Standard
6638 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6642 \begin_layout Standard
6644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6651 it is meant that the first usage of the
6655 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6657 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6665 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6670 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6671 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6673 \begin_inset space ~
6679 \begin_inset space ~
6683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6685 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6689 for more information.) Here is an example:
6692 \begin_layout Description
6694 \begin_inset space ~
6697 Example: This one shows how to use a
6700 \begin_inset space ~
6712 \begin_layout Description
6713 Usage: You should use the
6717 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6718 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6720 It's not a good idea to use a
6724 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6725 You're better off using
6737 paragraphs into them.
6740 \begin_layout Description
6741 Nesting: You can nest
6745 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6749 \begin_layout Standard
6750 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6751 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6752 them from the first line.
6755 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6757 \begin_inset Index idx
6760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6769 \begin_layout Standard
6774 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6775 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6779 \begin_layout Standard
6788 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6790 Here are its properties:
6793 \begin_layout Labeling
6794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6796 \begin_inset space ~
6799 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6808 of each line as the item label.
6813 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6814 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6815 space as described above.
6818 \begin_layout Labeling
6819 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6820 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6821 uses different margins for the item label and the
6822 body of the item text.
6823 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6824 label width plus a little extra space.
6827 \begin_layout Labeling
6828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6830 \begin_inset space ~
6833 width \SpecialChar LyX
6834 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6835 If the label width is larger, the label
6836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6843 into the first line.
6844 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6845 margin of the rest of the item text.
6848 \begin_layout Labeling
6849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6851 \begin_inset space ~
6854 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6859 environment has the same left margin.
6860 \begin_inset Newline newline
6863 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6868 \begin_inset space ~
6873 dialog (toolbar button
6876 arg "layout-paragraph"
6883 \begin_inset space ~
6888 determines the default label width.
6889 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6898 multiple times instead.
6899 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6909 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6912 \begin_inset space ~
6917 every time you alter a label in a
6922 \begin_inset Newline newline
6925 The predefined default width is the length of
6926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6934 \begin_inset space ~
6940 \begin_layout Standard
6945 list the same way as the
6949 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6955 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6964 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6965 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6967 \begin_inset space ~
6971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6973 reference "sec:Nesting"
6977 to learn about nesting.
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6981 There is yet another feature of the
6985 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6986 left-justifies the item labels by
6988 You can use additional
6992 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6993 justifies the item label.
6998 are documented in section
6999 \begin_inset space ~
7003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7005 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7010 Here are some examples:
7013 \begin_layout Labeling
7014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7015 Left The default for
7022 \begin_layout Labeling
7023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7024 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7031 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7034 \begin_layout Labeling
7035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7036 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7040 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7047 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7050 \begin_layout Subsection
7052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7054 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7059 \begin_inset Index idx
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7071 \begin_layout Standard
7072 The features described in this section require that the module
7074 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7076 is loaded in the document settings.
7077 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7083 \begin_inset Index idx
7086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7097 Custom Enumerate Lists
7098 \begin_inset Index idx
7101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7102 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7112 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7118 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7119 There you add the command
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7143 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7144 Code, look at section
7145 \begin_inset space ~
7149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7151 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7164 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7171 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7172 For capital Roman numerals replace
7184 in the command above.
7185 For Arabic numerals use
7193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7200 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7217 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 You can only number 26
7226 \begin_inset space ~
7229 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7237 \begin_layout Standard
7238 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7239 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7242 \begin_layout Standard
7243 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7246 \begin_layout Enumerate
7247 \begin_inset Argument 1
7250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7276 \begin_layout Enumerate
7277 \begin_inset Argument 1
7280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Enumerate
7308 \begin_layout Enumerate
7309 \begin_inset Argument 1
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7336 \begin_layout Enumerate
7337 \begin_inset Argument 1
7340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7366 \begin_layout Standard
7367 For this list these commands were used:
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_inset Newline newline
7389 \begin_inset Newline newline
7397 \begin_inset Newline newline
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7414 makes the label emphasized and
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7432 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7433 lists until you change the definition.
7441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7443 \begin_inset Index idx
7446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7447 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7455 \begin_layout Standard
7456 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7459 \begin_layout Enumerate
7460 \begin_inset Argument 1
7463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7482 \begin_inset Note Note
7485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7486 goes back to default numbering
7494 \begin_layout Enumerate
7498 \begin_layout Standard
7502 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7506 \begin_layout Standard
7507 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7512 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7513 to indicate that it is a resumed
7514 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7515 , but in the output.
7518 \begin_layout Standard
7519 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7527 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7536 \begin_layout Standard
7537 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7539 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7540 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7541 of a normal enumeration.
7542 There, insert the command
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7551 \begin_layout Standard
7556 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7560 \begin_layout Enumerate
7564 \begin_layout Enumerate
7568 \begin_layout Standard
7569 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7572 \begin_layout Enumerate
7573 \begin_inset Argument 1
7576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7592 This enumeration starts at 4
7595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7597 \begin_inset Index idx
7600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7609 \begin_layout Standard
7610 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7612 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7615 \begin_layout Itemize
7619 \begin_layout Itemize
7620 with standard spacing
7623 \begin_layout Standard
7624 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7626 Add there the command
7630 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7633 \begin_layout Itemize
7634 \begin_inset Argument 1
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7656 \begin_layout Itemize
7660 \begin_layout Itemize
7664 \begin_layout Standard
7665 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7672 \begin_inset Index idx
7675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7683 For more information see its documentation,
7684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7694 \begin_layout Standard
7695 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7697 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7698 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7702 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7705 \begin_layout Enumerate
7706 \begin_inset Argument 1
7709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7717 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7730 \begin_layout Enumerate
7731 with negative indentation
7734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7735 Further Customization
7736 \begin_inset Index idx
7739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7740 Lists ! Customization
7748 \begin_layout Standard
7749 You can also change the style of description lists.
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7759 \begin_layout Standard
7760 changes the description label font, the command
7763 \begin_layout Standard
7769 \begin_layout Standard
7770 sets the list style.
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 An example where the command
7777 \begin_layout Standard
7782 itshape, style=nextline
7785 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_layout Description
7791 \begin_inset space ~
7795 \begin_inset Argument 1
7798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7806 itshape, style=nextline
7816 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7817 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7821 \begin_layout Description
7823 \begin_inset space ~
7826 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7827 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7828 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7838 \begin_inset Index idx
7841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7849 For more information see its documentation
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7860 \begin_layout Subsection
7862 \begin_inset Index idx
7865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7876 \begin_inset space ~
7879 Address: An Overview
7882 \begin_layout Standard
7883 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7884 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7892 \begin_inset space ~
7898 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7899 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7900 gags on the document.
7901 In contrast, you can use the
7908 \begin_inset space ~
7913 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7914 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7918 \begin_layout Standard
7919 Of course, you're not limited to using
7926 \begin_inset space ~
7935 \begin_inset space ~
7940 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7941 some European academic papers.
7944 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7948 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7955 \begin_layout Standard
7960 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7961 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7965 \begin_inset space ~
7970 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7971 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7972 Here's an example of each:
7975 \begin_layout Right Address
7977 \begin_inset Newline newline
7981 \begin_inset Newline newline
7985 \begin_inset Newline newline
7988 When is it? What is today?
7991 \begin_layout Standard
7995 \begin_inset space ~
8001 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8003 the largest block of text on a single line.
8004 Here's an example of the
8011 \begin_layout Address
8013 \begin_inset Newline newline
8016 Where do I send this
8017 \begin_inset Newline newline
8020 Your post office and country
8023 \begin_layout Standard
8024 As you can see, both
8031 \begin_inset space ~
8036 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8041 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8042 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8048 This makes sense, since
8056 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8057 Thus, you have to use
8064 arg "newline-insert newline"
8069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8070 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8072 \begin_inset space ~
8076 \begin_inset space ~
8081 ) to start a new line in an
8088 \begin_inset space ~
8096 \begin_layout Subsection
8100 \begin_layout Standard
8101 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8102 or list of references.
8104 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8109 \begin_inset Index idx
8112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8121 \begin_layout Standard
8126 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8127 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8128 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8129 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8133 in anything else or vice versa.
8139 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8140 The book document classes ignores the
8144 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8148 in a letter document class.
8151 \begin_layout Standard
8156 environment does several things for you.
8157 First, it puts the centered label
8158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8166 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8168 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8169 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8170 the subsequent text.
8171 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8173 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8178 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8182 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8183 The new paragraph will still be in the
8188 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8189 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8193 \begin_inset Float figure
8200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8202 \begin_inset Graphics
8203 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8216 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8237 \begin_layout Standard
8238 We would love to demonstrate the
8242 environment, but since this document is in the
8243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8250 class, we can't do this.
8251 We inserted it therefore as figure
8252 \begin_inset space ~
8256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8258 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8263 If you have never heard of an
8264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8271 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8274 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8276 \begin_inset Index idx
8279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8288 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8295 \begin_layout Standard
8300 environment is used to list references.
8301 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8302 only use it at the end of the document.
8314 \begin_layout Standard
8315 When you first open a
8319 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8320 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8336 depending on the document class.
8337 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8338 Each paragraph of the
8342 environment is a bibliography entry.
8347 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8348 Each new paragraph is still in the
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8357 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8359 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8361 handling, have a look at section
8362 \begin_inset space ~
8366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8368 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8375 \begin_layout Subsection
8376 Special Environments
8379 \begin_layout Standard
8381 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8382 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8403 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8410 \begin_layout Standard
8416 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8418 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8423 key as a fixed whitespace.
8427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8440 \begin_inset space ~
8445 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8463 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8466 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8469 arg "newline-insert newline"
8486 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8487 So, when you finish using the
8492 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8493 Also, you can nest the
8498 environment inside of others.
8501 \begin_layout Standard
8502 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8509 arg "newline-insert newline"
8512 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8517 \begin_inset space \space{}
8527 arg "newline-insert newline"
8533 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 arg "newline-insert newline"
8547 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8555 You must put at least one
8559 in any line you want blank.
8560 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8569 since that will insert
8574 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8577 arg "self-insert \""
8583 \begin_layout Standard
8587 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8591 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8595 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8599 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8603 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8604 printf("Hello World!
8609 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8613 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8617 \begin_layout Standard
8618 This is just the standard
8619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8629 \begin_layout Standard
8635 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8637 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8638 as if you used a typewriter.
8639 \begin_inset Index idx
8642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8643 Paragraph environments|)
8648 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8651 Program Code Listings
8656 \begin_inset space ~
8664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8668 \begin_inset Index idx
8671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8680 \begin_layout Standard
8685 environment is similar to the
8690 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8691 computer console text.
8696 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8710 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8711 you can have empty lines.
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 have a certain language and a text style
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8730 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8731 and \SpecialChar TeX
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8736 Because of these properties
8740 works like a typewriter.
8744 \begin_layout Verbatim
8749 \begin_layout Verbatim
8753 The following 2 lines are empty:
8756 \begin_layout Verbatim
8760 \begin_layout Verbatim
8764 \begin_layout Verbatim
8766 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8771 \begin_layout Standard
8776 environment is identical to
8780 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8781 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8788 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8793 \begin_layout Section
8794 Nesting Environments
8795 \begin_inset Index idx
8798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8799 Nesting ! Environments
8805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8814 \begin_layout Subsection
8818 \begin_layout Standard
8820 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8822 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8824 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8826 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8838 \begin_layout Enumerate
8842 \begin_layout Enumerate
8847 \begin_layout Enumerate
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8856 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8861 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8862 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8864 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8870 \begin_inset space ~
8878 \begin_inset space ~
8882 \begin_inset space ~
8887 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8889 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8892 arg "depth-increment"
8898 arg "depth-decrement"
8912 arg "depth-increment"
8918 arg "depth-decrement"
8922 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8923 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8927 \begin_layout Standard
8928 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8929 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8930 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8931 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8932 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8935 \begin_layout Standard
8936 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8938 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8940 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8943 \begin_layout Subsection
8944 What You Can and Can't Nest
8947 \begin_layout Standard
8948 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8949 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8952 \begin_layout Standard
8953 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8954 than a simple yes or no.
8955 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8958 \begin_layout Itemize
8959 Completely unnestable
8962 \begin_layout Itemize
8963 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8967 \begin_layout Itemize
8968 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8972 \begin_layout Standard
8973 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8974 environments have them:
8977 \begin_layout Description
8978 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8979 Can't nest into them.
8983 \begin_layout Itemize
8989 \begin_layout Itemize
8995 \begin_layout Itemize
9001 \begin_layout Itemize
9007 \begin_layout Itemize
9014 \begin_layout Description
9016 \begin_inset space ~
9019 Nestable You can nest them.
9020 You can nest other things into them.
9024 \begin_layout Itemize
9030 \begin_layout Itemize
9036 \begin_layout Itemize
9042 \begin_layout Itemize
9048 \begin_layout Itemize
9054 \begin_layout Itemize
9060 \begin_layout Itemize
9066 \begin_layout Itemize
9073 \begin_layout Itemize
9079 \begin_layout Itemize
9086 \begin_layout Description
9087 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9088 You can't nest anything into them.
9092 \begin_layout Itemize
9098 \begin_layout Itemize
9104 \begin_layout Itemize
9110 \begin_layout Itemize
9116 \begin_layout Itemize
9122 \begin_layout Itemize
9128 \begin_layout Itemize
9134 \begin_layout Itemize
9140 \begin_layout Itemize
9146 \begin_layout Itemize
9152 \begin_layout Itemize
9158 \begin_layout Itemize
9164 \begin_layout Itemize
9170 \begin_layout Itemize
9174 \begin_inset space ~
9180 \begin_layout Itemize
9187 \begin_layout Standard
9188 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9196 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9206 \begin_inset space ~
9209 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9210 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9211 nested section headings violate this.
9219 \begin_layout Subsection
9220 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9221 \begin_inset Index idx
9224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9225 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9233 \begin_layout Standard
9234 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9235 affected by nesting anyhow.
9239 \begin_layout Itemize
9243 \begin_layout Itemize
9247 \begin_layout Itemize
9251 \begin_layout Standard
9253 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 Figures and tables in
9265 are not affected by this.
9270 Have a look at section
9271 \begin_inset space ~
9275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9277 reference "sec:Floats"
9281 for more information about
9288 \begin_layout Standard
9290 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9291 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9295 \begin_layout Standard
9296 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9304 of its own, it behaves just like a
9305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9312 paragraph environment.
9313 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9317 \begin_layout Standard
9318 Here's an example with a table:
9321 \begin_layout Enumerate
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 This is (a) and it's nested.
9331 \begin_layout Standard
9332 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9338 \begin_layout Standard
9340 \begin_inset Tabular
9341 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9342 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9343 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9344 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9428 \begin_layout Standard
9429 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9436 \begin_layout Enumerate
9438 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9442 \begin_layout Enumerate
9446 \begin_layout Standard
9447 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9450 \begin_layout Enumerate
9455 \begin_layout Enumerate
9456 This is (a) and it's nested.
9460 \begin_layout Standard
9461 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9467 \begin_layout Standard
9469 \begin_inset Tabular
9470 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9471 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9472 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9473 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9557 \begin_layout Standard
9558 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9564 \begin_layout Enumerate
9571 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9574 \begin_layout Enumerate
9578 \begin_layout Standard
9579 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9583 \begin_layout Standard
9584 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9587 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9590 \begin_layout Enumerate
9595 \begin_layout Enumerate
9596 This is (a) and it's nested.
9599 \begin_layout Standard
9600 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9606 \begin_layout Standard
9608 \begin_inset Tabular
9609 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9610 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9611 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9612 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9697 \begin_layout Standard
9698 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9704 \begin_layout Enumerate
9706 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9713 \begin_layout Enumerate
9717 \begin_layout Standard
9718 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9724 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9725 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9729 \begin_layout Subsection
9730 Usage and General Features
9733 \begin_layout Standard
9734 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9735 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9744 is the innermost possible depth.
9745 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9748 \begin_layout Enumerate
9749 level #1 – outermost
9753 \begin_layout Enumerate
9758 \begin_layout Enumerate
9763 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 \begin_layout Itemize
9773 \begin_layout Itemize
9782 \begin_layout Standard
9783 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9784 both of them in the example.
9785 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9795 For example, if we tried to nest another
9800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9807 , we would get errors.
9810 \begin_layout Subsection
9812 \begin_inset Index idx
9815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9824 \begin_layout Standard
9825 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9826 We have several examples of nested environments.
9827 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9831 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9832 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9835 \begin_layout Labeling
9836 \labelwidthstring MMM
9837 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9846 \begin_layout Labeling
9847 \labelwidthstring MMM
9848 #2-a This is level #2.
9849 We created it by using
9852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9865 \begin_layout Labeling
9866 \labelwidthstring MMM
9867 #3-a This is level #3.
9868 This time, we just enter
9875 arg "depth-increment"
9879 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9883 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9889 arg "depth-increment"
9896 \begin_layout Standard
9901 environment, nested inside of
9902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9910 So, it's at level #4.
9911 We did this by entering
9914 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9920 arg "depth-increment"
9923 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9928 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9944 \begin_layout Standard
9949 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9952 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9958 \begin_layout Labeling
9959 \labelwidthstring MMM
9960 #4-a This is level #4.
9964 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9967 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9972 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9976 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9981 keep nesting things inside
9982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9993 \begin_layout Labeling
9994 \labelwidthstring MMM
9995 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10000 \begin_layout Labeling
10001 \labelwidthstring MMM
10002 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10003 and this is level #6.
10004 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10008 \begin_layout Labeling
10009 \labelwidthstring MMM
10010 #5-b Back to level #5.
10014 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10020 arg "depth-decrement"
10027 \begin_layout Labeling
10028 \labelwidthstring MMM
10032 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10038 arg "depth-decrement"
10041 , we're back at level #4.
10045 \begin_layout Labeling
10046 \labelwidthstring MMM
10047 #3-b Back to level #3.
10048 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10052 \begin_layout Labeling
10053 \labelwidthstring MMM
10054 #2-b Back to level #2.
10058 \begin_layout Labeling
10059 \labelwidthstring MMM
10060 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10061 After this sentence, we will enter
10065 and change the paragraph environment back to
10072 \begin_layout Standard
10073 We could have also used the
10089 environment in place of the
10094 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10098 Example 2: Inheritance
10101 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10102 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10105 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10114 arg "depth-increment"
10118 \begin_inset Newline newline
10121 which, we will change to the
10129 \begin_layout Enumerate
10134 environment, at level #2.
10137 \begin_layout Enumerate
10138 Notice how the nested
10142 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10146 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10151 We ended this example by entering
10156 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10160 and reset the nesting depth by using
10163 arg "depth-decrement"
10169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10170 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10179 \begin_inset Argument 1
10182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10183 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10191 \begin_layout Enumerate
10192 This is level #1, in an
10196 paragraph environment.
10197 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10201 \begin_layout Enumerate
10206 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10212 arg "depth-increment"
10216 Now, what happens if we nest an
10220 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10221 label be? An asterisk?
10225 \begin_layout Itemize
10235 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10236 So, its label is a bullet.
10237 (We got here by using
10240 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10246 arg "depth-increment"
10249 , then changing the environment to
10257 \begin_layout Itemize
10258 Here's level #4, produced using
10261 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10267 arg "depth-increment"
10271 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10276 \begin_layout Enumerate
10278 to get to level #5.
10279 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10284 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10288 , because we are in the
10296 environment (that is, it is an
10311 \begin_layout Enumerate
10316 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10317 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10321 \begin_layout Enumerate
10322 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10325 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10328 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10331 \begin_layout Enumerate
10335 arg "depth-decrement"
10338 to decrease the depth after the next
10341 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10348 \begin_layout Enumerate
10350 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10355 \begin_layout Enumerate
10357 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10358 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10362 \begin_layout Enumerate
10363 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10372 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10377 reset the counter for the label.
10381 \begin_layout Enumerate
10385 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10391 arg "depth-decrement"
10394 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10395 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10396 into the twofold-nested
10404 \begin_layout Enumerate
10405 The same thing happens if we do another
10408 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10414 arg "depth-decrement"
10417 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10420 \begin_layout Standard
10421 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10426 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10437 The number of other
10441 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10448 The same rule applies for the
10452 environment, as well.
10455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10456 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10459 \begin_layout Enumerate
10460 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10461 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10462 the same detail with how we did it.
10471 \begin_layout Standard
10479 arg "depth-increment"
10486 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10487 the example in parentheses someplace.
10488 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10489 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10490 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10494 \begin_layout Enumerate
10499 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10503 \begin_layout Verse
10504 Now we will add verse.
10505 \begin_inset Newline newline
10508 It will get much worse.
10509 \begin_inset Newline newline
10519 arg "depth-increment"
10529 \begin_layout Verse
10530 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10531 \begin_inset Newline newline
10534 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10535 \begin_inset Newline newline
10541 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10549 \begin_layout Verse
10550 Here comes a table:
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10555 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10561 \begin_layout Standard
10563 \begin_inset Tabular
10564 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10565 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10566 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10567 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10652 \begin_layout Verse
10656 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10666 arg "depth-increment"
10672 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10678 \begin_inset Newline newline
10686 arg "depth-decrement"
10693 \begin_layout Enumerate
10698 : level #1) This is another item.
10699 Note that selecting a
10703 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10704 3 times to put the table inside the
10711 \begin_layout Quotation
10712 We're now ending the
10716 list and changing to
10721 We're still at level #1.
10722 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10723 The next set of paragraphs is a
10724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10731 We will nest both the
10738 \begin_inset space ~
10743 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10747 for the letter body.
10751 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10754 to preserve the depth.
10755 Remember that you need to use
10758 arg "newline-insert newline"
10761 to create multiple lines inside the
10768 \begin_inset space ~
10778 \begin_layout Right Address
10780 \begin_inset Newline newline
10783 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10784 \begin_inset Newline newline
10790 \begin_layout Address
10792 \begin_inset space ~
10798 \begin_layout Quotation
10799 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10803 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10804 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10805 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10806 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10807 as soon as possible.
10808 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10811 \begin_layout Quotation
10812 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10813 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10814 with your order, along with payment.
10817 \begin_layout Quotation
10818 We thank you again for your patience.
10821 \begin_layout Address
10823 \begin_inset Newline newline
10830 \begin_layout Quotation
10831 That ends that example!
10834 \begin_layout Standard
10835 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10836 gives you a lot of power with just
10838 We could have easily nested an
10859 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10862 \begin_layout Subsection
10864 \begin_inset Index idx
10867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10868 Nesting ! Separation
10874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10876 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10883 \begin_layout Standard
10884 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10886 For example you need two different enumerations:
10889 \begin_layout Enumerate
10894 \begin_layout Enumerate
10899 \begin_layout Enumerate
10903 \begin_layout Standard
10904 \begin_inset Separator plain
10910 \begin_layout Itemize
10916 \begin_layout Standard
10917 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10923 \begin_layout Enumerate
10927 \begin_layout Enumerate
10931 \begin_layout Enumerate
10935 \begin_layout Standard
10936 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10937 list item and use the menu
10939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10940 Separated <Name> Above
10944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10945 Separated <Name> Below
10948 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10949 ) and before or behind it the
10951 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10954 \begin_layout Standard
10955 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10956 (red arrow in LyX).
10957 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10958 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10961 \begin_layout Standard
10962 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10965 arg "paragraph-break"
10972 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10975 \begin_layout Section
10976 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10977 \begin_inset Index idx
10980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10989 \begin_layout Standard
10990 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10991 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10993 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10994 be broken at the end of a line.
10995 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10999 \begin_layout Subsection
11001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11003 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11008 \begin_inset Index idx
11011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11020 \begin_layout Standard
11021 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11022 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11023 ) not to break the line at
11025 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11028 \begin_layout Quote
11029 Further documentation is given in section
11030 \begin_inset Newline newline
11034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11036 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11043 \begin_layout Standard
11044 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11059 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11068 A protected space is set with
11070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11071 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11073 \begin_inset space ~
11081 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11087 \begin_layout Subsection
11089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11091 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11096 \begin_inset Index idx
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 Spacing ! Horizontal
11108 \begin_layout Standard
11109 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11116 The length units are listed in Appendix
11117 \begin_inset space ~
11121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11123 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11134 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11139 \begin_inset Index idx
11142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11143 Spaces ! Inter-word
11151 \begin_layout Standard
11152 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11153 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11154 at the ends of sentences.
11155 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11156 automatically takes care about this.
11157 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11158 followed by a period; see section
11159 \begin_inset space ~
11163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11165 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11170 To insert a normal space, select
11172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11173 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11175 \begin_inset space ~
11183 arg "space-insert normal"
11189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11193 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11198 \begin_inset Index idx
11201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11210 \begin_layout Standard
11212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11219 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11228 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11229 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11230 inside abbreviations:
11233 \begin_layout Quote
11235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11239 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11242 \begin_layout Standard
11243 or between values and units.
11244 Compare for example this:
11245 \begin_inset Newline newline
11249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11253 \begin_inset Newline newline
11256 10 kg (normal space
11259 \begin_layout Standard
11260 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11265 \begin_inset space ~
11273 arg "space-insert thin"
11279 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11283 \begin_layout Standard
11284 You can also insert the following space types:
11287 \begin_layout Description
11289 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11291 \begin_inset space ~
11297 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11301 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11305 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11309 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11311 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11314 space between the arrows.
11315 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11319 \begin_layout Description
11321 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11323 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11327 \begin_inset space ~
11330 space A line with a
11331 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11335 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11339 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11343 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11345 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11348 space between the arrows.
11351 \begin_layout Description
11353 \begin_inset space ~
11357 \begin_inset space ~
11360 space A line with a
11361 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11365 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11369 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11372 negative thin space between the arrows.
11375 \begin_layout Description
11377 \begin_inset space ~
11381 \begin_inset space ~
11384 space A line with a
11385 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11389 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11393 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11396 negative medium space between the arrows.
11399 \begin_layout Description
11401 \begin_inset space ~
11405 \begin_inset space ~
11408 space A line with a
11409 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11413 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11417 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11420 negative thick space between the arrows.
11423 \begin_layout Description
11425 \begin_inset space ~
11429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11433 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11437 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11441 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11445 \begin_inset space ~
11449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11452 em) space between the arrows.
11455 \begin_layout Description
11457 \begin_inset space ~
11461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11465 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11469 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11473 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11477 \begin_inset space ~
11481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11484 em) space between the arrows.
11487 \begin_layout Description
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11497 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11501 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11505 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11516 em) space between the arrows.
11519 \begin_layout Description
11521 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11529 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11534 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11541 cm space between the arrows.
11544 \begin_layout Standard
11546 \begin_inset space ~
11550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11552 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11556 lists the different space sizes.
11559 \begin_layout Standard
11560 \begin_inset Float table
11567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11568 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11573 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11577 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11587 \begin_inset Tabular
11588 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11589 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11590 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11591 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11688 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11694 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11705 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11716 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11722 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11733 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11763 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11922 \begin_inset Index idx
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11934 \begin_layout Standard
11935 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11936 feature for adding extra space
11937 in a uniform fashion.
11938 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11939 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11940 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11941 equally between themselves.
11944 \begin_layout Standard
11945 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11948 \begin_layout Quote
11950 This is on the left side
11951 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11954 This is on the right
11957 \begin_layout Quote
11960 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11964 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11970 \begin_layout Quote
11973 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11977 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11981 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11987 \begin_layout Standard
11988 That was an example in the
11994 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11998 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12002 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12005 is one in a standard paragraph.
12006 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12010 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12013 \begin_layout Standard
12014 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12017 \begin_inset space ~
12022 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12025 \begin_layout Standard
12027 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12031 \begin_inset space ~
12037 \begin_layout Standard
12039 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12043 \begin_inset space ~
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12051 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12055 \begin_inset space ~
12061 \begin_layout Standard
12063 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12067 \begin_inset space ~
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12075 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12077 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12081 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12082 (= opened downwards)
12085 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12089 \begin_inset space ~
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12097 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12099 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12103 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12107 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12111 \begin_inset space ~
12117 \begin_layout Standard
12118 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12126 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12130 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12132 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12133 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12137 option in the space dialog.
12145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12149 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12154 \begin_inset Index idx
12157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12166 \begin_layout Standard
12167 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12168 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12171 \begin_layout Standard
12172 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12175 What is correct English?:
12176 \begin_inset Newline newline
12180 \begin_inset Newline newline
12184 \begin_inset space ~
12187 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12188 \begin_inset Newline newline
12192 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12203 \begin_inset Newline newline
12207 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12218 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12224 \begin_layout Standard
12226 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12231 \begin_inset space ~
12235 \begin_inset space ~
12239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12243 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12250 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12267 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12276 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12277 That is why it is named
12278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12286 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12287 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12291 \begin_layout Subsection
12293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12295 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12300 \begin_inset Index idx
12303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12312 \begin_layout Standard
12313 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12316 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12318 \begin_inset space ~
12324 There you find the following sizes:
12327 \begin_layout Standard
12340 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12341 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12346 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12348 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12349 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12351 \begin_inset space ~
12357 \begin_inset Index idx
12360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12361 Document ! Settings
12366 for the paragraph separation.
12367 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12376 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12380 \begin_layout Standard
12382 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12391 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12392 size including line spacing.
12397 \begin_layout Standard
12403 \begin_inset Index idx
12406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12412 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12413 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12418 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12419 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12428 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12437 s are described in section
12438 \begin_inset space ~
12442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12444 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12453 If there are several
12457 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12458 You can therefore use
12462 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12465 \begin_layout Standard
12470 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12471 \begin_inset space ~
12475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12477 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12484 \begin_layout Standard
12485 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12495 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12496 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12508 \begin_layout Subsection
12509 Paragraph Alignment
12510 \begin_inset Index idx
12513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12514 Paragraph ! Alignment
12522 \begin_layout Standard
12523 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12528 dialog (toolbar button
12531 arg "layout-paragraph"
12535 There are five possibilities:
12538 \begin_layout Itemize
12546 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12552 \begin_layout Itemize
12560 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12566 \begin_layout Itemize
12574 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12580 \begin_layout Itemize
12588 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12594 \begin_layout Itemize
12602 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12608 \begin_layout Standard
12609 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12610 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12611 the left and right margins.
12612 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12615 \begin_layout Standard
12617 This paragraph is right aligned,
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12622 this one is centered,
12625 \begin_layout Standard
12627 this one is left aligned.
12630 \begin_layout Subsection
12632 \begin_inset Index idx
12635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12636 Page breaks ! Forced
12642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12644 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12651 \begin_layout Standard
12652 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12654 force a page break where you want one.
12655 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12656 is good at page breaking.
12657 Only if you use a lot of
12661 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12662 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12665 \begin_layout Standard
12666 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12667 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12671 have to change the page breaking.
12674 \begin_layout Standard
12675 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12677 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12680 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12682 \begin_inset space ~
12688 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12691 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12693 \begin_inset space ~
12698 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12700 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12701 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12704 \begin_layout Standard
12705 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12706 at the top of a page.
12707 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12709 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12710 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12711 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12715 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12719 to learn more about
12726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12730 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12735 \begin_inset Index idx
12738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 Page breaks ! Clear
12747 \begin_layout Standard
12748 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12749 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12750 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12751 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12752 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12755 \begin_layout Standard
12756 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12759 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12767 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12772 \begin_inset space ~
12776 \begin_inset space ~
12781 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12782 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12785 \begin_layout Subsection
12787 \begin_inset Index idx
12790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12799 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12806 \begin_layout Standard
12807 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12809 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12812 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12814 \begin_inset space ~
12818 \begin_inset space ~
12826 arg "newline-insert newline"
12830 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12833 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12835 \begin_inset space ~
12839 \begin_inset space ~
12847 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12850 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12852 This is useful to avoid
12853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12860 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12863 \begin_layout Standard
12864 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12865 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12867 very good at line breaking.
12868 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12869 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12870 \begin_inset space ~
12874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12876 reference "sec:Quote"
12881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12883 reference "sec:Verse"
12888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12890 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12897 \begin_layout Subsection
12899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12901 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12906 \begin_inset Index idx
12909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12918 \begin_layout Standard
12920 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12931 \begin_layout Standard
12935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12936 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12943 you can insert horizontal lines.
12944 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12945 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12946 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12949 \begin_layout Standard
12951 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12962 \begin_layout Section
12963 Characters and Symbols
12966 \begin_layout Standard
12967 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12968 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12969 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12977 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12981 for information on how this is done.
12984 \begin_layout Standard
12985 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12990 dialog via the menu
12992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12993 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12999 \begin_layout Standard
13000 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13008 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13009 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13011 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13019 \begin_layout Section
13020 Fonts and Text Styles
13021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13023 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13030 \begin_layout Subsection
13032 \begin_inset Index idx
13035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13044 \begin_layout Standard
13045 There are two types of fonts:
13048 \begin_layout Description
13050 \begin_inset space ~
13054 \begin_inset Index idx
13057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13063 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13068 characters) in the font.
13069 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13070 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13071 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13072 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13073 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13074 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13075 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13076 \begin_inset Newline newline
13079 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13080 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13081 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13082 sizes than at small ones.
13083 \begin_inset Newline newline
13097 \begin_inset space ~
13105 \begin_layout Description
13107 \begin_inset space ~
13111 \begin_inset Index idx
13114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13120 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13121 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13122 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13123 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13124 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13125 image manipulation program.
13126 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13127 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13128 \begin_inset space ~
13131 pixels high up to 34
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13135 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13136 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13137 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13139 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13140 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13141 \begin_inset Newline newline
13144 Bitmap fonts are named
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13152 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13155 \begin_layout Standard
13156 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13157 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13158 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13159 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13160 use scalable fonts.
13163 \begin_layout Standard
13164 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13167 \begin_layout Standard
13168 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13170 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13172 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13175 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13176 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13177 font to emphasize text, you use an
13178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13186 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13188 In \SpecialChar LyX
13189 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13193 \begin_layout Subsection
13196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13198 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13205 \begin_layout Standard
13206 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13207 used its own fonts.
13208 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13209 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13212 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13213 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13214 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13215 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13216 to a word processor.
13217 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13218 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13219 files are very portable across
13220 different machines.
13221 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13222 has increased a lot
13223 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13226 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13228 \begin_inset space ~
13232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13234 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13239 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13240 code in the document
13241 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13244 \begin_layout Standard
13245 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13246 engines that are also able directly
13247 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13249 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13251 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13253 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13254 that is installed on your system.
13255 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13258 \begin_layout Standard
13259 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13267 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13268 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13276 \begin_layout Subsection
13277 Document Font and Font size
13278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13280 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13285 \begin_inset Index idx
13288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13295 \begin_inset Index idx
13298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13307 \begin_layout Standard
13308 You can set the document fonts in the
13310 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13314 \begin_inset Index idx
13317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13318 Document ! Settings
13328 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13329 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13332 \begin_inset space ~
13341 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13343 \begin_inset space ~
13346 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13349 \begin_layout Standard
13354 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13355 This requires that you use
13367 as the output format, i.
13368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13372 \begin_inset space \space{}
13375 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13376 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13377 installed (see section
13378 \begin_inset space ~
13382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13384 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13389 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13391 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13392 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13397 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13398 cannot determine the family.
13399 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13400 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13403 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13406 \begin_layout Standard
13407 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13408 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13413 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13419 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13421 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13423 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13426 font encoding, this is
13427 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13428 , depending on the document language,
13431 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13432 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13440 \begin_inset space ~
13446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13456 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13457 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13465 \begin_inset space ~
13471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13479 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13500 European Computer Modern
13503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13511 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13514 \begin_layout Standard
13519 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13520 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13525 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13528 \begin_inset space ~
13533 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13539 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13540 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13543 \begin_layout Itemize
13547 \begin_inset space ~
13552 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13565 \begin_inset space ~
13570 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13571 community in order to replace
13575 as the default font.
13576 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13577 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13580 \begin_inset space ~
13593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13594 One difference is improved kerning.
13602 \begin_layout Itemize
13603 If you do not like the look of
13611 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13612 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13616 \begin_inset space ~
13622 \begin_inset space ~
13632 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13633 \begin_inset space ~
13636 serif and typewriter fonts,
13640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13641 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13648 \begin_inset space ~
13657 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13662 \begin_inset space \space{}
13670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13674 \begin_inset space \space{}
13680 \begin_inset space ~
13688 \begin_inset space ~
13698 but you can also select your own.
13699 \begin_inset Newline newline
13702 The differences between roman,
13705 \begin_inset space ~
13714 fonts are explained in section
13715 \begin_inset space ~
13719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13721 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13726 \begin_inset Newline newline
13732 \begin_inset space ~
13737 was originally designed for newspapers.
13738 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13739 into the small newspaper columns.
13743 \begin_inset space ~
13748 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13751 \begin_layout Standard
13752 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13765 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13770 depends on the class you are using.
13771 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13774 \begin_layout Standard
13775 Note that the font size is the
13780 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13781 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13782 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13783 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13786 \begin_inset space ~
13792 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13793 \begin_inset space ~
13797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13799 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13806 \begin_layout Standard
13810 \begin_inset space ~
13815 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13817 \begin_inset space ~
13820 serif or typewriter.
13825 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13835 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13838 \begin_layout Standard
13843 LaTeX font encoding
13845 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13846 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13852 \begin_inset Index idx
13855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13863 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13865 \begin_inset space ~
13869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13871 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13878 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13879 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13880 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13884 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13895 Use Old Style Figures
13899 Use True Small Caps
13902 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13905 Use Old Style Figures
13907 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13909 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13917 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13921 Use True Small Caps
13923 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13924 of scaled capitals.
13925 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13926 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13927 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13931 \begin_layout Standard
13933 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13934 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13935 provided by the font package (or the
13939 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13944 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13950 \begin_layout Standard
13955 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13956 a font to display the script characters.
13960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13961 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13967 \begin_inset Index idx
13970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13977 So this has no effect for the document language
13993 \begin_layout Standard
13996 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13998 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13999 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14005 \begin_inset Index idx
14008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14010 packages ! microtype
14019 \begin_layout Standard
14022 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14024 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14029 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14030 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14036 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14037 \begin_inset space ~
14041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14043 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14053 \begin_layout Standard
14054 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14058 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14066 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14071 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14072 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14074 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14076 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14079 dialog, see section
14080 \begin_inset space ~
14084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14086 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14098 \begin_layout Subsection
14102 \begin_layout Standard
14103 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14104 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14106 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14107 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14108 choose a math font in the dialog
14110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14114 \begin_inset Index idx
14117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14118 Document ! Settings
14124 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14125 automatically selects a math font.
14126 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14127 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14136 \begin_inset space ~
14142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14147 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14148 document font is available.
14151 \begin_layout Standard
14152 Note that the math font will not be used for
14156 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14162 or by the insertion of the command
14169 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14170 \begin_inset space ~
14174 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14175 while the math characters do not.
14177 \begin_inset space ~
14180 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14183 \begin_inset space ~
14191 \begin_inset space ~
14196 in the document font settings.
14199 \begin_layout Standard
14200 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14201 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14202 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14203 font (in most cases
14204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14210 \begin_inset space ~
14216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14219 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14220 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14228 \begin_inset space ~
14234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14240 \begin_layout Subsection
14242 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14244 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14248 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14252 name "subsec:charstyles"
14259 \begin_inset Index idx
14262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14269 \begin_inset Index idx
14272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14281 \begin_layout Standard
14282 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14283 automatically changes the
14284 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14287 style for certain paragraph environments.
14289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14290 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14292 This is where we meet the concept of
14298 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14304 \begin_layout Standard
14306 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14311 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14313 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14326 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14335 e., available with all document classes.
14336 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14340 for specific purposes.
14341 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14344 \begin_layout Standard
14346 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14347 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14357 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14361 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14374 — you customized the
14379 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14380 among them, encourage the use of
14392 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14393 \begin_inset space ~
14397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14399 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14404 Rather than fiddling with
14408 , they encourage the use of
14412 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14417 \begin_inset Quotes els
14421 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14424 ), not their form (
14425 \begin_inset Quotes els
14429 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14433 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14434 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14435 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14436 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14437 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14438 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14444 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14448 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14449 With a semantic markup (such as
14453 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14458 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14460 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14461 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14464 \begin_layout Standard
14466 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14467 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14468 by \SpecialChar LyX
14474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14476 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14477 Builtin Text Styles
14478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14480 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14487 \begin_layout Standard
14489 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14490 The two builtin text styles can be
14491 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14495 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14499 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14500 both of these styles
14503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14511 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14517 \begin_layout Standard
14522 style, do one of the following:
14525 \begin_layout Itemize
14526 click on the toolbar button
14535 \begin_layout Itemize
14536 use the key binding
14543 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14547 \begin_layout Itemize
14549 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14557 arg "dialog-show character"
14563 arg "dialog-show character"
14566 ) as described in section
14567 \begin_inset space ~
14571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14573 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14582 \begin_layout Standard
14583 These commands are all toggles.
14588 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14591 \begin_layout Standard
14592 One typically uses the
14596 style for proper names.
14598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14605 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14615 \begin_layout Standard
14617 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14622 is producing text in
14626 , but the definition can be changed.
14631 \begin_layout Standard
14633 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14635 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14643 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14650 \begin_layout Itemize
14651 clicking on the toolbar button
14660 \begin_layout Itemize
14661 using the keybindings
14668 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14672 \begin_layout Itemize
14674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14682 arg "dialog-show character"
14688 arg "dialog-show character"
14691 ) as described in section
14692 \begin_inset space ~
14696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14698 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14707 \begin_layout Standard
14712 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14714 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14716 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14719 packages use a different font
14720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14721 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14727 \begin_layout Standard
14728 We've been using the
14732 style all over the place in this document.
14733 Here's one more example:
14736 \begin_layout Quotation
14740 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14742 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14748 \begin_layout Standard
14749 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14750 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14751 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14752 the common tendency to overuse
14753 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14760 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14762 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14766 \begin_layout Standard
14768 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14769 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14770 only as font changes and integrated in the
14778 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14781 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14788 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14790 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14794 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14799 \begin_inset space ~
14802 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14810 arg "dialog-show character"
14816 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14818 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14824 arg "dialog-show character"
14828 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14832 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14834 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14838 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14845 \begin_layout Standard
14847 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14848 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14850 \begin_inset space ~
14854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14856 reference "subsec:Modules"
14863 ), or local layout settings (see section
14864 \begin_inset space ~
14868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14870 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14875 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14879 markup for specific functions.
14880 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14885 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14895 \begin_inset Quotes els
14899 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14905 \begin_layout Standard
14907 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14908 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14910 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14916 \begin_layout Standard
14918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14919 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14924 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14925 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14926 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14931 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14932 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14937 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14945 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14946 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14947 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14948 \begin_inset Flex Code
14951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14953 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14962 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14967 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14976 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14981 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14990 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14991 on screen their formal appearance.
14996 \begin_layout Subsection
14998 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15000 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15004 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15010 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15012 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15018 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15020 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15026 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15031 \begin_inset Index idx
15034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15043 \begin_layout Standard
15044 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15045 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15048 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15050 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15052 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15056 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15057 the properties of text passages
15058 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15062 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15063 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15064 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15065 from ordinary dialog.
15066 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15070 \begin_layout Standard
15072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15073 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15074 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15075 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15076 the properties of the respective text passages.
15081 comes in as a last resort.
15086 \begin_layout Standard
15087 Before we document how to
15088 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15089 use custom character style
15090 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15091 tweak the text properties
15093 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15094 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15096 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15100 \begin_inset Newline newline
15103 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15104 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15107 \begin_layout Standard
15109 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15110 use custom character styles
15111 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15112 tweak text properties
15115 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15118 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15123 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15125 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15131 arg "dialog-show character"
15136 dialog or press the toolbar button
15139 arg "dialog-show character"
15144 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15147 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15148 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15150 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15153 property that you can choose.
15154 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15157 \begin_inset space ~
15162 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15164 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15168 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15170 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15175 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15176 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15177 environments all at once.
15180 \begin_layout Standard
15182 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15187 properties, and their options (in addition to
15190 \begin_inset space ~
15196 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15200 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15208 \begin_layout Labeling
15209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15223 The possible options are:
15227 \begin_layout Labeling
15228 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15233 This is the Roman font family.
15234 Normally a serif font.
15235 It's also the default family.
15245 \begin_layout Labeling
15246 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15250 \begin_inset space ~
15257 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15269 \begin_layout Labeling
15270 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15277 This is the Typewriter font family.
15283 arg "font-typewriter"
15289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15293 \begin_layout Standard
15295 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15296 The general differences of these families are:
15299 \begin_layout Itemize
15301 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15306 fonts use characters with serifs.
15307 These are the small
15308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15315 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15316 The following example shows the difference:
15317 \begin_inset Newline newline
15321 \begin_inset Newline newline
15326 text without serifs
15329 \begin_inset Newline newline
15332 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15333 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15340 \begin_layout Itemize
15342 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15347 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15348 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15349 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15352 \begin_layout Itemize
15354 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15367 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15385 \begin_inset Newline newline
15389 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15394 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15407 \begin_inset Note Note
15410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15412 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15413 For more on phantoms see section
15414 \begin_inset space ~
15418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15420 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15430 \begin_inset Newline newline
15439 \begin_layout Labeling
15440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15445 This corresponds to the print weight.
15450 \begin_layout Labeling
15451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15456 This is the Medium font series.
15457 It's also the default series.
15460 \begin_layout Labeling
15461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15468 This is the Bold font series.
15481 \begin_layout Labeling
15482 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15487 As the name implies.
15492 \begin_layout Labeling
15493 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15498 This is the Upright font shape.
15499 It's also the default shape.
15502 \begin_layout Labeling
15503 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15513 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15518 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15523 s the Italic font shape
15529 \begin_layout Labeling
15530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15537 This is the Slanted font shape
15539 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15540 , this is different from italic).
15543 \begin_layout Labeling
15544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15548 \begin_inset space ~
15555 This is the Small caps font shape
15562 \begin_layout Labeling
15563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15568 Alters the text color.
15569 Note that not all DVI
15570 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15572 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15575 viewers are able to display colors.
15577 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15581 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15583 \begin_inset space ~
15590 , which means that the document default color set in
15592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15593 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15599 \begin_inset space ~
15605 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15611 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15691 \begin_inset Index idx
15694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15701 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15707 \begin_layout Labeling
15708 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15713 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15714 the language of the document.
15715 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15717 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15720 in blue to indicate the change
15721 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15722 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15726 \begin_inset Newline newline
15729 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15731 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15732 When using the spell checking (see section
15733 \begin_inset space ~
15737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15739 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15743 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15744 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15746 \begin_inset Newline newline
15749 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15751 Exclude from Spellchecking
15754 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15757 \begin_layout Labeling
15758 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15763 Alters the size of the font.
15765 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15767 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15771 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15774 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15775 document font size.
15776 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15777 the details, but a general description of what
15783 \begin_layout Labeling
15784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15805 arg "font-size tiny"
15811 \begin_layout Labeling
15812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15833 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15839 \begin_layout Labeling
15840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15861 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15867 \begin_layout Labeling
15868 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15889 arg "font-size small"
15895 \begin_layout Labeling
15896 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15910 It's also the default size.
15914 arg "font-size normal"
15920 \begin_layout Labeling
15921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15942 arg "font-size large"
15948 \begin_layout Labeling
15949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15970 arg "font-size larger"
15976 \begin_layout Labeling
15977 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15998 arg "font-size largest"
16004 \begin_layout Labeling
16005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16026 arg "font-size huge"
16032 \begin_layout Labeling
16033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16054 arg "font-size giant"
16060 \begin_layout Labeling
16061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16066 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16086 arg "font-size increase"
16092 \begin_layout Labeling
16093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16098 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16118 arg "font-size decrease"
16125 \begin_layout Standard
16130 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16131 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16133 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16134 — use those instead.
16135 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16138 \begin_layout Labeling
16139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16141 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16152 change a few other things at the character level
16153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16154 have text passages being underlined
16158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16159 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16160 days, when you could not change fonts.
16161 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16162 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16163 because some people
16167 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16174 \begin_layout Labeling
16175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16177 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16184 This is text with emphasize on
16187 This might seem like the same as
16191 , but it is actually a bit different.
16197 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16199 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16200 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16204 \begin_layout Labeling
16205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16207 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16212 Don't use underlining.
16217 \begin_layout Labeling
16218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16220 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16224 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16232 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16234 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16243 arg "font-underline"
16249 \begin_inset Newline newline
16253 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16256 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16257 when you could not change fonts.
16258 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16259 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16260 because some people
16264 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16269 \begin_layout Labeling
16270 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16274 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16276 \begin_inset space ~
16285 This is text with Double under
16286 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16297 arg "font-underunderline"
16301 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16303 \begin_inset Newline newline
16306 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16307 about double underbar
16312 \begin_layout Labeling
16313 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16317 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16319 \begin_inset space ~
16328 This is text with Wavy under
16329 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16331 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16340 arg "font-underwave"
16344 \begin_inset Newline newline
16347 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16348 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16354 \begin_layout Labeling
16355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16362 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16368 \begin_layout Labeling
16369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16371 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16376 Don't use strikethrough.
16379 \begin_layout Labeling
16380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16384 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16386 \begin_inset space ~
16390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16398 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16400 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16401 Single strikethrough
16409 arg "font-strikeout"
16413 \begin_inset Newline newline
16416 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16417 changed in the meantime.
16420 \begin_layout Labeling
16421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16423 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16427 \begin_inset space ~
16431 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16433 \begin_inset space ~
16437 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16445 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16447 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16453 \begin_inset Newline newline
16456 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16460 \begin_layout Standard
16462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16463 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16464 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16465 \begin_inset space ~
16469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16471 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16478 \begin_layout Itemize
16480 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16487 This is text with emphasize on
16492 \begin_layout Itemize
16496 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16503 This is text with Noun on.
16505 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16512 , this is a logical attribute.
16513 Normally it's equivalent to
16516 \begin_inset space ~
16526 \begin_layout Standard
16527 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16528 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16530 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16535 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16536 chosen a new character style
16537 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16538 applied a text property
16541 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16546 \begin_inset space ~
16549 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16551 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16557 arg "dialog-show character"
16565 arg "dialog-show character"
16568 ) dialog, the settings are
16569 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16573 You can activate the
16574 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16576 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16577 last applied properties
16579 by using the toolbar button
16582 arg "textstyle-apply"
16586 The button lets you apply
16587 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16588 your custom character style
16589 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16592 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16594 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16595 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16596 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16597 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16602 \begin_layout Standard
16603 To completely reset the
16604 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16606 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16607 text properties of a selection
16609 to the default, use
16610 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16612 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16622 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16627 from the menu of the toolbar button
16630 arg "textstyle-apply"
16637 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16638 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16639 you just set the shape to
16640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16658 \begin_inset space ~
16672 \begin_layout Standard
16674 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16675 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16683 \begin_inset space ~
16695 \begin_layout Itemize
16697 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16710 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16728 \begin_inset Newline newline
16732 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16746 \begin_inset Note Note
16749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16750 For more on phantoms see section
16751 \begin_inset space ~
16755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16757 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16767 \begin_inset Newline newline
16773 \begin_layout Itemize
16775 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16780 fonts use characters with serifs.
16781 These are the small
16782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16789 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16790 The following example shows the difference:
16791 \begin_inset Newline newline
16795 \begin_inset Newline newline
16800 text without serifs
16803 \begin_inset Newline newline
16806 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16807 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16814 \begin_layout Itemize
16816 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16821 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16822 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16823 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16828 \begin_layout Standard
16830 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16838 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16839 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16842 \begin_inset space ~
16847 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16848 the property to be removed.
16849 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16850 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16851 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16869 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16870 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16878 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16882 \begin_inset space ~
16887 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16898 If you, for example, set
16899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16917 \begin_inset space ~
16922 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16931 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16936 \begin_layout Standard
16938 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16941 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16942 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16945 \begin_layout Section
16946 Printing and Previewing
16949 \begin_layout Subsection
16953 \begin_layout Standard
16954 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16955 using \SpecialChar LyX
16956 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16957 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16958 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16959 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16961 Additional Features
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16968 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16971 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16972 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16973 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16976 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16977 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16978 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16979 to turn your writing into printable output.
16980 This happens in two stages:
16983 \begin_layout Enumerate
16984 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16985 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16987 a file with the extension,
16988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17002 \begin_layout Enumerate
17003 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17004 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17005 to use the commands in the
17009 file to produce printable output.
17012 \begin_layout Subsection
17013 Output file formats
17014 \begin_inset Index idx
17017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17026 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17034 Simple text (ASCII)
17035 \begin_inset Index idx
17038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17039 File formats ! ASCII
17047 \begin_layout Standard
17048 This file type has the extension
17049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17061 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
17062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17065 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17072 \begin_layout Standard
17073 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
17075 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17076 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17078 \begin_inset space ~
17084 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17085 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17086 bibliography (section
17087 \begin_inset space ~
17091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17093 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17098 If your document includes such material, use
17100 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17101 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17103 \begin_inset space ~
17107 \begin_inset space ~
17111 \begin_inset space ~
17119 \begin_inset space ~
17123 \begin_inset space ~
17129 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17130 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
17133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17136 \begin_inset Index idx
17139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17140 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17149 \begin_layout Standard
17150 This file type has the extension
17151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17162 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17165 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17166 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17167 -Errors or to process it manually
17168 with console commands.
17169 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17170 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17171 's temporary directory whenever you
17172 view or export your document.
17175 \begin_layout Standard
17176 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17177 -file using the menu
17179 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17180 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17184 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17185 export variants are explained in section
17186 \begin_inset space ~
17190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17192 reference "subsec:Export"
17199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17201 \begin_inset Index idx
17204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17213 \begin_layout Standard
17214 This file type has the extension
17215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17235 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17236 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17237 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17241 \begin_layout Standard
17242 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17243 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17244 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17245 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17246 when you view the DVI.
17247 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17250 \begin_layout Standard
17251 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17253 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17254 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17259 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17260 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17262 \begin_inset space ~
17268 The latter option uses the program
17270 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17276 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17279 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17280 font access (see section
17281 \begin_inset space ~
17285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17287 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17292 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17293 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17300 \begin_inset Index idx
17303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17304 File formats ! PostScript
17312 \begin_layout Standard
17313 This file type has the extension
17314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17326 PostScript was developed by the company
17330 as a printer language.
17331 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17333 PostScript can be seen as a
17334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17337 programming language
17338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17341 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17346 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17353 \begin_inset Index idx
17356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17358 packages ! pstricks
17368 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17371 \begin_layout Standard
17372 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17376 Encapsulated PostScript
17377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17380 (EPS, file extension
17381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17393 As \SpecialChar LyX
17394 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17395 convert them in the background to EPS.
17396 If, for example, you have 50
17397 \begin_inset space ~
17400 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17402 \begin_inset space ~
17405 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17406 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17408 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17409 EPS to avoid this problem.
17412 \begin_layout Standard
17413 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17415 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17416 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17424 \begin_inset Index idx
17427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17434 \begin_inset Index idx
17437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17446 \begin_layout Standard
17447 This file type has the extension
17448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17464 Portable Document Format
17465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17472 was derived from PostScript.
17473 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17482 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17483 looks exactly the same.
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17491 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17495 (JPG, file extension
17496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17523 Portable Network Graphics
17524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17527 (PNG, file extension
17528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17540 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17541 converts them in the
17542 background to one of these formats.
17543 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17544 will slow down your workflow.
17545 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17548 \begin_layout Standard
17549 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17551 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17557 \begin_layout Description
17559 \begin_inset space ~
17562 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17566 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17569 \begin_layout Description
17571 \begin_inset space ~
17578 ) This uses the program
17580 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17583 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17586 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17589 is a new engine, derived from
17593 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17594 access (see section
17595 \begin_inset space ~
17599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17601 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17606 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17607 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17612 \begin_layout Description
17614 \begin_inset space ~
17621 ) This uses the program
17626 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17632 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17633 font access (see section
17634 \begin_inset space ~
17638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17640 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17645 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17646 vertically written Japanese.
17649 \begin_layout Description
17651 \begin_inset space ~
17654 (cropped) This is the same as
17657 \begin_inset space ~
17662 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17663 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17664 to generate good-looking
17665 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17668 \begin_layout Description
17670 \begin_inset space ~
17673 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17677 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17681 \begin_layout Description
17683 \begin_inset space ~
17686 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17690 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17691 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17695 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17696 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17699 \begin_layout Standard
17703 \begin_inset space ~
17712 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17713 works without problems.
17714 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17715 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17719 \begin_inset space ~
17727 \begin_inset space ~
17732 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17742 \begin_inset Index idx
17745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17746 FileFormats ! XHTML
17752 \begin_inset Index idx
17755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17764 \begin_layout Standard
17765 This file type has the extension
17766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17778 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17779 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17780 When \SpecialChar LyX
17781 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17782 suitable for the purpose.
17783 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17785 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17786 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17789 between different formats, which are described in section
17791 Math Output in XHTML
17796 \begin_inset space ~
17804 \begin_layout Standard
17805 XHTML output remains
17806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17813 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17814 features are supported yet.
17818 and the World Wide Web
17822 Additional Features
17824 manual, for more information.
17827 \begin_layout Standard
17828 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17830 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17831 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17837 \begin_layout Subsection
17839 \begin_inset Index idx
17842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17851 \begin_layout Standard
17852 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17853 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17862 or use the toolbar button
17869 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17870 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17871 \begin_inset space ~
17875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17877 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17881 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17883 \begin_inset space ~
17887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17889 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17894 Further output formats can be selected via
17896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17897 View (Other Formats)
17899 or the toolbar button
17908 \begin_layout Standard
17909 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17910 viewer window using the menu
17912 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17918 Update (Other Formats)
17923 \begin_layout Standard
17924 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17927 To have a real output, export your document.
17930 \begin_layout Section
17931 A few Words about Typography
17932 \begin_inset Index idx
17935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17944 \begin_layout Subsection
17945 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17946 \begin_inset Index idx
17949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17956 \begin_inset Index idx
17959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17968 \begin_layout Standard
17969 In \SpecialChar LyX
17971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17982 symbol comes in four variants: the
17999 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18005 \begin_layout Standard
18006 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18016 height_special "totalheight"
18021 backgroundcolor "none"
18024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18025 \begin_inset Tabular
18026 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18027 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18028 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18029 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18030 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18031 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18032 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18060 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18061 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18100 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18123 system key combination
18127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18128 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18140 and the em dash with
18143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18156 is the Mac label for the right
18166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18179 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18180 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 system key combination or
18203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18217 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18230 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18269 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18275 \begin_layout Standard
18276 Dashes can also be inserted with
18278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18280 \begin_inset space ~
18283 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18291 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18292 and 2014 for the en dash).
18295 \begin_layout Standard
18296 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18297 mode and has a length of its own.
18298 Here are some examples:
18301 \begin_layout Enumerate
18302 line- and page-breaks
18303 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18313 \begin_layout Enumerate
18315 \begin_inset space ~
18319 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18329 \begin_layout Enumerate
18330 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18331 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18341 \begin_layout Enumerate
18342 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18346 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18356 \begin_layout Standard
18358 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18360 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18361 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18369 \begin_layout Subsection
18370 Dashes and Line Breaks
18371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18373 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18380 \begin_layout Standard
18381 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18382 case and locale, e.
18383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18389 \begin_layout Itemize
18390 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18391 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18394 \begin_layout Itemize
18395 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18399 \begin_layout Itemize
18400 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18401 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18404 \begin_layout Standard
18405 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18406 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18417 allows line breaks after hyphens
18418 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18420 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18423 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18426 \begin_layout Enumerate
18427 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18428 \begin_inset space ~
18431 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18433 The Elements of Typographic Style
18436 \begin_inset space ~
18439 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18442 \begin_layout Enumerate
18443 Unwanted line breaks
18448 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18450 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18453 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 Prevent Hyphenation
18465 \begin_inset space ~
18481 in \SpecialChar TeX
18483 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18484 , a protected space does not suffice
18488 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18495 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18496 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18497 in the document language.
18498 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18512 \begin_layout Itemize
18514 \begin_inset space ~
18518 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18528 height_special "totalheight"
18533 backgroundcolor "none"
18536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18545 \begin_layout Itemize
18547 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18557 height_special "totalheight"
18562 backgroundcolor "none"
18565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 \begin_inset space ~
18575 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18576 \begin_inset space ~
18579 – sont très utiles.
18582 \begin_layout Itemize
18587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18596 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18600 \begin_layout Standard
18601 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18602 \begin_inset space ~
18605 – in contrast to an overfull line
18606 \begin_inset space ~
18609 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18613 \begin_layout Standard
18614 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18617 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18618 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18619 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18620 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18625 \begin_layout Enumerate
18626 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18627 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18628 or \SpecialChar TeX
18634 \begin_layout Itemize
18636 \begin_inset space ~
18639 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18640 \begin_inset space ~
18643 – sont très utiles.
18647 \begin_layout Enumerate
18648 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18649 \begin_inset Newline newline
18654 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18655 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18657 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18659 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18661 \begin_inset space ~
18667 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18669 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18671 \begin_inset space ~
18682 \begin_layout Itemize
18683 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18684 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18685 should be followed by
18686 a line break opportunity.
18689 \begin_layout Standard
18690 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18691 \begin_inset space ~
18695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18697 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18708 \begin_layout Enumerate
18709 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18710 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18711 or en dashes (see section
18712 \begin_inset space ~
18716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18718 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18729 Changes and backwards compatibility
18732 \begin_layout Standard
18733 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18735 \begin_inset space ~
18738 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18739 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18748 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18749 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18757 \begin_layout Standard
18758 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18760 \begin_inset space ~
18763 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18765 prevents ligation to dashes.
18767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18774 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18779 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18780 after the input (unless the current text font is
18788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18789 The behavior was changed since
18790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18805 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18806 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18807 as non-breakable dashes.
18808 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18816 \begin_layout Standard
18819 \begin_inset space ~
18827 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18829 \begin_inset space ~
18832 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18836 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18837 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18838 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18840 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18844 If you used both literal and
18845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18852 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18854 \begin_inset space ~
18857 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18858 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18861 \begin_layout Subsection
18863 \begin_inset Index idx
18866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18875 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18882 \begin_layout Standard
18883 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18884 but automatically in the output.
18885 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18891 \begin_inset Index idx
18894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18901 following the rules of the document language.
18903 does not hyphenate text in the
18907 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18910 \begin_layout Standard
18912 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18916 font and with unusual constructs, like
18917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18925 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18926 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18927 This is done with the menu
18929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18930 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18932 \begin_inset space ~
18938 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18940 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18944 \begin_layout Standard
18945 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18946 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18957 would then see the hyphen
18958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18965 as a line break possibility.
18966 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18967 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18971 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18974 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18976 Prevent Hyphenation
18981 \begin_inset space ~
18989 \begin_layout Subsection
18991 \begin_inset Index idx
18994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19004 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19007 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19014 \begin_layout Standard
19015 When \SpecialChar LyX
19016 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19017 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19019 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19025 appropriate amount of space.
19026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19029 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19031 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19032 gets after another word.
19035 \begin_layout Standard
19036 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19037 not work in all cases.
19039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19050 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19051 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19054 \begin_layout Standard
19055 Here are some examples of
19059 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19062 \begin_layout Itemize
19067 \begin_layout Itemize
19072 \begin_layout Standard
19073 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19076 \begin_layout Itemize
19078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19082 this is too much space!
19085 \begin_layout Itemize
19090 \begin_layout Standard
19091 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19094 \begin_layout Standard
19095 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19098 \begin_layout Enumerate
19102 \begin_inset space ~
19107 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19108 \begin_inset space ~
19112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19114 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19119 \begin_inset Index idx
19122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19123 Spaces ! inter-word
19131 \begin_layout Enumerate
19135 \begin_inset space ~
19140 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19147 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19152 \begin_inset Index idx
19155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 \begin_layout Enumerate
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset space ~
19176 \begin_inset space ~
19183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19185 \begin_inset space ~
19190 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19191 This function is also bound to
19194 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19200 \begin_layout Standard
19201 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19204 \begin_layout Itemize
19206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19210 \begin_inset space \space{}
19213 this is too much space!
19216 \begin_layout Itemize
19217 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19221 \begin_layout Standard
19222 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19223 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19225 will take care of this.
19228 \begin_layout Standard
19229 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19239 feature described in the section
19241 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19246 Additional Features
19251 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19253 \begin_inset Index idx
19256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 Typography ! Quotation marks
19263 \begin_inset Index idx
19266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19267 Quotation marks | see
19271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 \begin_layout Standard
19299 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19300 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19301 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19311 The keyboard character,
19315 , generates this automatically.
19318 \begin_layout Standard
19319 You can specify what character the
19323 key produces by using the submenu
19329 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19333 \begin_inset Index idx
19336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19337 Document ! Settings
19342 dialog and switching the
19346 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19347 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19349 \begin_inset space ~
19355 \begin_layout Labeling
19356 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19368 \begin_inset space ~
19372 \begin_inset space ~
19376 \begin_inset Quotes els
19380 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19394 \begin_inset Quotes els
19398 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19401 quotation marks (as common, e.
19402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19408 \begin_layout Labeling
19409 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19412 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19416 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19424 \begin_inset space ~
19428 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19432 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19438 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19442 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19446 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19450 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19453 quotation marks (as common, e.
19454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19460 \begin_layout Labeling
19461 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19464 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19472 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_inset space ~
19480 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19484 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19490 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19494 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19498 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19502 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19505 quotation marks (as common, e.
19506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19512 \begin_layout Labeling
19513 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19516 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19520 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19524 \begin_inset space ~
19528 \begin_inset space ~
19532 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19536 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19542 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19546 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19550 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19554 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19557 quotation marks (as common, e.
19558 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19564 \begin_layout Labeling
19565 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19568 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19572 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19576 \begin_inset space ~
19580 \begin_inset space ~
19584 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19588 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19594 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19598 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19602 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19606 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19609 quotation marks (as common, e.
19610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19613 g., in Switzerland)
19616 \begin_layout Labeling
19617 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19620 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19624 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19628 \begin_inset space ~
19632 \begin_inset space ~
19636 \begin_inset Quotes als
19640 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19646 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19650 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19654 \begin_inset Quotes als
19658 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19661 quotation marks (as common, e.
19662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19668 \begin_layout Labeling
19669 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19672 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19676 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19680 \begin_inset space ~
19684 \begin_inset space ~
19688 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19692 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19698 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19702 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19706 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19710 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19713 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19716 \begin_layout Labeling
19717 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19720 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19724 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19728 \begin_inset space ~
19732 \begin_inset space ~
19736 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19740 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19746 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19750 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19754 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19758 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19761 quotation marks (as common, e.
19762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19765 g., in Great Britain)
19768 \begin_layout Labeling
19769 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19772 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19776 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19780 \begin_inset space ~
19784 \begin_inset space ~
19788 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19792 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19798 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19802 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19806 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19810 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19813 quotation marks (as common, e.
19814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19820 \begin_layout Labeling
19821 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19824 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19828 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19832 \begin_inset space ~
19836 \begin_inset space ~
19840 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19844 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19850 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19854 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19858 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19862 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19865 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19871 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19872 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19873 the inner marks differ).
19881 \begin_layout Labeling
19882 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19885 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19889 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19893 \begin_inset space ~
19897 \begin_inset space ~
19901 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19905 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19911 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19915 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19919 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19923 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19926 quotation marks (as common, e.
19927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19933 \begin_layout Labeling
19934 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19937 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19941 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19945 \begin_inset space ~
19949 \begin_inset space ~
19953 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19957 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19963 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19967 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19971 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19975 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19978 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19981 \begin_layout Labeling
19982 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19983 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19991 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19997 \begin_inset space ~
20001 \begin_inset space ~
20007 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20015 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20019 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20023 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20027 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20031 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20034 quotation marks (as common, e.
20035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20043 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20044 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20052 \begin_layout Labeling
20053 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20054 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20062 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20068 \begin_inset space ~
20072 \begin_inset space ~
20078 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20086 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20090 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20094 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20098 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20102 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20105 quotation marks (as common, e.
20106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20109 g., in North Korea and China)
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20115 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20123 \begin_layout Standard
20124 Inner quotation marks
20128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20130 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20131 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20139 does not necessarily mean
20140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20148 This is why we call them
20149 \begin_inset Quotes els
20153 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20169 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20171 \begin_inset Quotes els
20175 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20178 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20181 arg "quote-insert inner"
20186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20192 \begin_layout Standard
20193 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20194 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20195 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20196 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20197 If you check the setting
20199 Use dynamic quotation marks
20203 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20204 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20207 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20208 they appear in a special color).
20209 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20210 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20215 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20218 \begin_layout Standard
20219 Individual quotation marks (i.
20220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20223 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20224 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20228 \begin_layout Subsection
20230 \begin_inset Index idx
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 Typography ! Ligatures
20240 \begin_inset Index idx
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20274 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20281 \begin_layout Standard
20282 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20283 print them as single characters.
20284 These groups are known as
20289 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20290 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20292 Here are the standard ligatures:
20295 \begin_layout Itemize
20299 \begin_layout Itemize
20303 \begin_layout Itemize
20307 \begin_layout Itemize
20311 \begin_layout Itemize
20315 \begin_layout Standard
20316 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20319 \begin_layout Standard
20320 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20321 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20329 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20345 To break a ligature, use
20347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20348 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20350 \begin_inset space ~
20357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20368 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20385 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20393 \begin_layout Subsection
20395 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20397 \begin_inset Index idx
20400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20410 \begin_layout Standard
20413 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20414 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20418 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20421 \begin_layout Description
20423 The name of the game.
20426 \begin_layout Description
20428 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20432 \begin_layout Description
20434 The \SpecialChar TeX
20435 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20439 \begin_layout Description
20440 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20441 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20445 \begin_layout Standard
20446 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20452 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20460 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20461 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20462 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20463 converges to the number
20464 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20467 : The actual version is
20468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20476 , the previous one was
20477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20488 \begin_layout Subsection
20490 \begin_inset Index idx
20493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 \begin_layout Standard
20503 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20504 space between two words.
20505 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20515 for units use the menu
20517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20518 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20520 \begin_inset space ~
20528 arg "space-insert thin"
20534 \begin_layout Standard
20535 Here is an example to show the differences:
20538 \begin_layout Standard
20539 \begin_inset Tabular
20540 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20541 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20542 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20543 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 \begin_inset space ~
20554 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 space between number and unit
20573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20582 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 half space between number and unit
20607 \begin_layout Subsection
20609 \begin_inset Index idx
20612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20621 \begin_layout Standard
20622 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20624 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20625 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20626 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20627 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20628 These bits of text became known as
20639 \begin_layout Standard
20640 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20641 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20642 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20643 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20644 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20645 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20646 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20647 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20648 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20649 \begin_inset Newline newline
20657 \begin_inset Newline newline
20665 \begin_inset Newline newline
20668 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20669 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20670 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20672 \begin_inset space ~
20676 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20678 key "latexcompanion"
20684 \begin_inset space ~
20688 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20695 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20696 's page break mechanism.
20699 \begin_layout Chapter
20700 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20703 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20710 \begin_layout Standard
20711 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20714 \begin_inset space ~
20720 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20723 \begin_layout Section
20725 \begin_inset Index idx
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20744 \begin_layout Standard
20746 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20749 \begin_layout Description
20752 \begin_inset space ~
20755 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20756 \begin_inset Newline newline
20760 \begin_inset Note Note
20763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20772 \begin_layout Description
20773 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20774 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20775 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20778 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20779 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20781 \begin_inset space ~
20787 \begin_inset Newline newline
20791 \begin_inset Note Comment
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20804 \begin_layout Description
20806 \begin_inset space ~
20809 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20810 set in the document settings under
20812 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20814 \begin_inset space ~
20820 \begin_inset Newline newline
20824 \begin_inset Newline newline
20828 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20838 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20843 of a comment that appears in the output.
20849 \begin_inset Newline newline
20853 \begin_inset Newline newline
20856 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20859 \begin_layout Standard
20860 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20872 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20875 \begin_layout Section
20877 \begin_inset Index idx
20880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20889 name "sec:Footnotes"
20896 \begin_layout Standard
20898 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20904 or the toolbar button
20907 arg "footnote-insert"
20919 \begin_inset Graphics
20920 filename clipart/footnote.png
20929 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20930 's representation of your footnote.
20940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20959 label, the box will
20963 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20964 Clicking on the box label again will close
20977 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20978 and click on the footnote
20993 \begin_layout Standard
20994 Here is an example footnote:
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21011 \begin_layout Standard
21012 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21013 position where the footnote box is placed.
21014 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21015 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21016 according to the document class.
21018 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21019 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21025 ey are described in the
21028 \begin_inset space ~
21036 \begin_layout Section
21038 \begin_inset Index idx
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21050 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21057 \begin_layout Standard
21058 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21060 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21064 \begin_inset space ~
21069 or the toolbar button
21072 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21098 appearing within your text.
21099 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21100 's representation of your margin
21109 \begin_layout Standard
21110 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21114 \begin_inset Marginal
21117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 This is a marginal note.
21127 \begin_layout Standard
21128 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21129 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21130 pages, right on odd pages.
21133 \begin_layout Standard
21134 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21137 \begin_inset space ~
21145 \begin_inset space ~
21153 \begin_layout Section
21154 Graphics and Images
21155 \begin_inset Index idx
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21165 \begin_inset Index idx
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21177 name "sec:Graphics"
21184 \begin_layout Standard
21185 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21186 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21189 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21198 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21201 \begin_layout Standard
21202 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21207 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21208 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21210 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21211 \begin_inset space ~
21215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21217 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21224 \begin_layout Standard
21229 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21230 of the image in the output.
21231 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21235 \begin_inset space ~
21239 \begin_inset space ~
21248 \begin_inset space ~
21252 \begin_inset space ~
21256 \begin_inset space ~
21261 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21262 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21270 \begin_layout Standard
21274 \begin_inset space ~
21278 \begin_inset space ~
21283 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21284 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21286 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21291 \begin_inset space ~
21296 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21297 with the image size is printed.
21300 \begin_layout Standard
21301 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21302 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21304 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21307 \begin_layout Standard
21309 \begin_inset Graphics
21310 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21318 \begin_layout Standard
21319 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21320 the image into a float, see section
21321 \begin_inset space ~
21325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21327 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21334 \begin_layout Subsection
21336 \begin_inset Index idx
21339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21348 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21355 \begin_layout Standard
21356 You can insert images in any known file format.
21357 But as we explained in section
21358 \begin_inset space ~
21362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21364 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21368 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21370 therefore uses the program
21374 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21375 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21376 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21377 \begin_inset space ~
21381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21383 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21390 \begin_layout Standard
21391 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21394 \begin_layout Description
21396 \begin_inset space ~
21399 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21400 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21401 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21405 Graphics Interchange Format
21406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21409 (GIF, file extension
21410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21422 \begin_inset Index idx
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21457 Portable Network Graphics
21458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21461 (PNG, file extension
21462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21474 \begin_inset Index idx
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21509 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21513 (JPG, file extension
21514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21538 \begin_inset Index idx
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 \begin_layout Description
21574 \begin_inset space ~
21577 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21579 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21580 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21581 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21582 \begin_inset Newline newline
21585 Scalable image formats can be
21586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21589 Scalable Vector Graphics
21590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21593 (SVG, file extension
21594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21606 \begin_inset Index idx
21609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21641 Encapsulated PostScript
21642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21645 (EPS, file extension
21646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21658 \begin_inset Index idx
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21693 Portable Document Format
21694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21697 (PDF, file extension
21698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21710 \begin_inset Index idx
21713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21728 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21729 result will not be scalable.
21730 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21744 \begin_layout Standard
21745 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21752 \begin_layout Subsection
21753 Grouping of Image Settings
21754 \begin_inset Index idx
21757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21758 Images ! Settings grouping
21766 \begin_layout Standard
21767 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21769 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21770 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21772 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21773 need to manually change each of them.
21776 \begin_layout Standard
21777 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21780 \begin_inset space ~
21784 \begin_inset space ~
21796 \begin_inset space ~
21800 \begin_inset space ~
21806 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21807 and checking the name of the desired group.
21810 \begin_layout Section
21812 \begin_inset Index idx
21815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21831 \begin_layout Standard
21832 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21835 arg "tabular-insert"
21840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21844 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21845 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21846 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21849 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21850 from the rest of the table.
21851 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21852 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21854 Here is an example table:
21857 \begin_layout Standard
21859 \begin_inset Tabular
21860 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21861 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21862 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21863 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21864 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21865 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22063 \begin_layout Standard
22065 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22066 This corresponds to the
22067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22074 table style listed in the style selection.
22077 \begin_layout Standard
22079 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22080 Other available styles include:
22083 \begin_layout Itemize
22085 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22094 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22098 \begin_layout Itemize
22100 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22101 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22104 \begin_layout Itemize
22106 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22115 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22116 bold top/bottom lines (see
22127 \begin_layout Standard
22129 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22130 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22131 button can be changed in
22133 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22134 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22138 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22142 \begin_layout Subsection
22146 \begin_layout Standard
22147 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22150 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22154 This brings up the table dialog.
22155 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22156 cursor is placed currently.
22157 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22158 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22159 done on all of your selection.
22162 \begin_layout Standard
22163 In addition to the table dialog, the
22166 \begin_inset space ~
22171 helps you in setting table properties.
22172 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22175 \begin_layout Standard
22179 \begin_inset space ~
22184 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22185 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22186 current cell respectively.
22187 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22189 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22190 of text, see section
22191 \begin_inset space ~
22195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22197 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22204 \begin_layout Standard
22205 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22206 using the check box
22215 This will merge the cells to
22219 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22220 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22221 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22222 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22223 in the last row without the upper border:
22226 \begin_layout Standard
22228 \begin_inset Tabular
22229 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22230 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22231 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22232 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22233 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22234 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22254 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22330 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 \begin_layout Standard
22366 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22367 -arguments for the table.
22368 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22369 explained in the chapter
22376 \begin_inset space ~
22382 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22383 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22384 but are visible in the output.
22387 \begin_layout Standard
22388 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 Most DVI-viewers are
22400 able to display rotations.
22408 \begin_layout Standard
22413 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22418 adds lines for all cell borders.
22421 \begin_layout Subsection
22423 \begin_inset Index idx
22426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 Tables ! Multi-page
22433 \begin_inset Index idx
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22445 \begin_layout Standard
22446 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22449 \begin_inset space ~
22453 \begin_inset space ~
22461 \begin_inset space ~
22466 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22467 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22470 \begin_layout Description
22475 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22476 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22477 Except for the first page, if
22480 \begin_inset space ~
22488 \begin_layout Description
22492 \begin_inset space ~
22497 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22498 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22501 \begin_layout Description
22506 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22507 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22508 except for the last page, if
22511 \begin_inset space ~
22519 \begin_layout Description
22523 \begin_inset space ~
22528 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22529 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22532 \begin_layout Description
22533 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22534 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22540 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22543 \begin_inset space ~
22551 \begin_layout Standard
22552 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22553 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22554 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22560 In this context, first means first in this order:
22563 \begin_inset space ~
22575 \begin_inset space ~
22580 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22583 \begin_layout Standard
22585 \begin_inset Tabular
22586 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22587 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22588 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22589 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22590 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22591 <row endfirsthead="true">
22592 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22598 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22603 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22622 <row endfirsthead="true">
22623 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <row endhead="true">
22656 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22667 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <row endhead="true">
22687 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22698 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22707 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22719 <row endfoot="true">
22720 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22740 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22771 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23712 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23772 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23834 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23865 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23896 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23927 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23958 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24113 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24144 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24175 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24206 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24268 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24299 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24330 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24361 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24392 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24423 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24454 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24485 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24516 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24547 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24578 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24640 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24671 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24701 <row endlastfoot="true">
24702 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24713 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24722 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24739 \begin_layout Subsection
24741 \begin_inset Index idx
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24753 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24760 \begin_layout Standard
24761 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24762 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24763 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24764 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24768 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24771 \begin_layout Standard
24772 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24773 for the column in the table dialog.
24774 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24775 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24779 \begin_layout Standard
24781 \begin_inset Tabular
24782 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24783 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24784 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24785 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24786 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24806 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24875 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24931 This is longer now.
24936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24987 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24988 This is longer now.
24993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25019 \begin_layout Standard
25020 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25021 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25027 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25032 Selection with the mouse or with
25036 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25037 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25038 the selection from outside the table.
25041 \begin_layout Section
25043 \begin_inset Index idx
25046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25062 \begin_layout Subsection
25066 \begin_layout Standard
25067 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25068 have a fixed location.
25070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25077 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25085 \begin_inset space ~
25090 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25091 too many notes on the current page.
25094 \begin_layout Standard
25095 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25096 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25097 and pages without text.
25098 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25099 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25100 Floats are therefore numbered.
25101 Referencing is described in section
25102 \begin_inset space ~
25106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25108 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25115 \begin_layout Standard
25116 To insert a float, use the menu
25118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25122 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25123 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25125 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25126 \begin_inset Index idx
25129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25135 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25136 paragraph within the float.
25137 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25138 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25139 left-clicking on the box label.
25140 A closed float box looks like this:
25141 \begin_inset Graphics
25142 filename clipart/float.png
25147 – a gray button with a red label.
25150 \begin_layout Standard
25151 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25153 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25156 \begin_layout Subsection
25158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25160 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25165 \begin_inset Index idx
25168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25169 Floats ! Figure floats
25177 \begin_layout Standard
25179 \begin_inset space ~
25183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25185 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25189 was created using the menu
25191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25192 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25198 arg "float-insert figure"
25202 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25211 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25215 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25216 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25218 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25220 \begin_inset space ~
25228 arg "layout-paragraph"
25234 \begin_layout Standard
25235 \begin_inset Float figure
25242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 \begin_inset Graphics
25245 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25260 name "fig:A-star-in"
25277 \begin_layout Standard
25278 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25279 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25290 ) and refer to it using the menu
25292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25298 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25302 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25303 vague references like
25304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25311 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25312 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25322 For more about cross-references, see section
25323 \begin_inset space ~
25327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25329 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25336 \begin_layout Standard
25337 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25338 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25339 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25340 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25341 as described in section
25342 \begin_inset space ~
25346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25348 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25354 \begin_inset space ~
25358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25360 reference "fig:Two-images"
25364 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25365 You can also set the images one below the other.
25367 \begin_inset space ~
25371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25373 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25380 reference "fig:Star"
25384 are the subfigures.
25387 \begin_layout Standard
25388 \begin_inset Float figure
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25396 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25400 \begin_inset Float figure
25407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25413 name "fig:Undefinable"
25425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25426 \begin_inset Graphics
25427 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25439 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25443 \begin_inset Float figure
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 \begin_inset Graphics
25470 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25482 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25489 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25494 name "fig:Two-images"
25511 \begin_layout Subsection
25513 \begin_inset Index idx
25516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25517 Floats ! Table floats
25525 \begin_layout Standard
25526 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25529 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25532 or the toolbar button
25535 arg "float-insert table"
25539 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25540 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25541 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25543 \begin_inset space ~
25547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25549 reference "tab:Table-float"
25556 \begin_layout Standard
25557 \begin_inset Float table
25564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25565 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25570 name "tab:Table-float"
25582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25584 \begin_inset Tabular
25585 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25586 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25587 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25588 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25589 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25716 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25737 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25740 \end{array}\right]$
25748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25761 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25782 \begin_layout Subsection
25784 \begin_inset Index idx
25787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25796 \begin_layout Standard
25798 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25799 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25800 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25802 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25810 \begin_inset space ~
25818 \begin_layout Section
25820 \begin_inset Index idx
25823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25832 \begin_layout Standard
25834 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25836 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25837 \begin_inset space \space{}
25843 \begin_layout Standard
25844 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25845 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25851 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25852 and its alignment within the page.
25855 \begin_layout Standard
25857 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25867 height_special "totalheight"
25872 backgroundcolor "none"
25875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25878 This is a minipage.
25879 The text is set in an italic style.
25882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25885 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25886 another formatting.
25894 \begin_layout Standard
25895 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25898 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25902 as described in section
25903 \begin_inset space ~
25907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25909 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25914 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25920 \begin_layout Standard
25921 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25931 height_special "totalheight"
25936 backgroundcolor "none"
25939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25940 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25941 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25947 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25951 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25961 height_special "totalheight"
25966 backgroundcolor "none"
25969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25970 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25971 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25979 \begin_layout Standard
25980 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25986 \begin_layout Standard
25987 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25989 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25996 \begin_inset space ~
26004 \begin_layout Chapter
26005 Mathematical Formulas
26006 \begin_inset Index idx
26009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26016 \begin_inset Index idx
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26050 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26057 \begin_layout Standard
26058 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26063 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26066 \begin_layout Section
26068 \begin_inset Index idx
26071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26080 \begin_layout Standard
26081 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26094 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26096 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26097 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26098 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26106 \begin_layout Standard
26107 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26111 \begin_inset space ~
26116 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26119 \begin_layout Standard
26120 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26121 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26124 \begin_layout Standard
26125 This is a line with an inline formula
26126 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26132 \begin_layout Standard
26133 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26134 paragraph, like this one:
26135 \begin_inset Formula
26142 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26145 \begin_layout Standard
26147 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26149 For example, typing
26150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26163 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26164 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26168 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26171 \begin_inset space ~
26179 \begin_layout Subsection
26180 Navigating in Formulas
26181 \begin_inset Index idx
26184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26193 \begin_layout Standard
26194 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26195 achieved with the arrow keys.
26197 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26198 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26203 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26204 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26208 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26212 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26215 \end{array}\right]$
26223 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26228 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26229 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26232 \begin_layout Standard
26237 , printed in this document as
26238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26242 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26249 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26250 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26251 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26256 For example, if you want
26257 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26265 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26275 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26279 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26284 , since in the latter case only the
26287 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26292 will be under the square root sign:
26293 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26299 \begin_layout Standard
26300 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26302 \begin_inset Formula
26304 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26313 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26314 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26317 \begin_layout Subsection
26321 \begin_layout Standard
26322 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26323 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26327 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26328 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26329 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26330 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26331 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26335 \begin_layout Subsection
26336 Exponents and Subscripts
26337 \begin_inset Index idx
26340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26347 \begin_inset Index idx
26350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26359 \begin_layout Standard
26360 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26363 arg "math-superscript"
26369 arg "math-subscript"
26372 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26374 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26377 , type in a formula
26380 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26390 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26396 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26400 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26406 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26412 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26421 , you have to use an extra
26425 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26426 For example, if you want
26427 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26433 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26439 Subscripts are similar: To get
26440 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26446 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26454 \begin_layout Subsection
26456 \begin_inset Index idx
26459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26468 \begin_layout Standard
26469 Create a fraction either with the command
26475 or by using the icon
26478 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26484 \begin_inset space ~
26490 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26491 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26492 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26497 To move back up, press
26502 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26503 \begin_inset Formula
26505 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26508 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26516 \begin_layout Subsection
26518 \begin_inset Index idx
26521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26530 \begin_layout Standard
26531 Roots can be created using the
26534 \begin_inset space ~
26542 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26548 arg "math-insert \\root"
26570 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26576 always produces a square root.
26579 \begin_layout Subsection
26580 Operators with Limits
26581 \begin_inset Index idx
26584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26591 \begin_inset Index idx
26594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26603 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26610 \begin_layout Standard
26612 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26616 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26619 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26620 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26621 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26622 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26623 The sum operator will automatically place its
26624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26631 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26633 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26637 \begin_inset Formula
26639 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26644 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26648 \begin_layout Standard
26649 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26651 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26652 behind the operator and using the menu
26654 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26655 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26657 \begin_inset space ~
26661 \begin_inset space ~
26675 \begin_layout Standard
26676 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26685 \begin_inset Index idx
26688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26695 \begin_inset Formula
26697 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26702 which will place the
26703 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26715 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26716 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26722 \begin_layout Standard
26723 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26730 Have a look at section
26731 \begin_inset space ~
26735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26737 reference "subsec:Functions"
26741 for an explanation of function macros.
26744 \begin_layout Subsection
26746 \begin_inset Index idx
26749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26758 \begin_layout Standard
26759 Most math symbols can be found in the
26762 \begin_inset space ~
26767 under one of several categories; including
26784 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26788 \begin_layout Standard
26789 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26790 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26791 don't have to use the
26794 \begin_inset space ~
26799 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26801 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26804 \begin_layout Subsection
26806 \begin_inset Index idx
26809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26818 \begin_layout Standard
26819 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26825 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26831 \begin_inset space ~
26839 arg "math-insert \\space"
26843 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26844 For example, the sequence
26849 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26852 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26854 \begin_inset Graphics
26855 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26860 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26861 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26862 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26863 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26864 , because they are negative
26866 Here are two examples:
26869 \begin_layout Standard
26879 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26885 \begin_layout Standard
26895 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26901 \begin_layout Subsection
26903 \begin_inset Index idx
26906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26915 name "subsec:Functions"
26922 \begin_layout Standard
26926 \begin_inset space ~
26931 contains under the button
26934 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26937 a number of function macros, such as
26938 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26942 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26950 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26957 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26958 avoid confusions, because
26959 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26963 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26969 \begin_layout Standard
26970 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26972 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26976 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26982 \begin_layout Standard
26983 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26984 are placed, as described in section
26985 \begin_inset space ~
26989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26991 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26998 \begin_layout Subsection
27000 \begin_inset Index idx
27003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27012 \begin_layout Standard
27013 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27015 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27016 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27017 commands, for example, to enter
27018 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27021 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27022 Our example is entered by typing
27027 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27034 \begin_inset space ~
27038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27040 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27044 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27047 \begin_layout Standard
27048 \begin_inset Float table
27055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27056 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27061 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27065 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27075 \begin_inset Tabular
27076 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27077 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27078 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27079 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27080 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27164 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27218 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27272 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27326 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27434 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27488 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27542 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27596 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27641 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27662 \begin_layout Standard
27663 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27666 \begin_inset space ~
27674 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27677 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27681 \begin_layout Section
27682 Brackets and Delimiters
27683 \begin_inset Index idx
27686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27693 \begin_inset Index idx
27696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27705 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27712 \begin_layout Standard
27713 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27715 For some purposes, using just the keys
27720 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27721 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27722 toolbar delimiter icon
27725 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27729 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27730 \begin_inset Formula
27732 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27740 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27741 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27745 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27748 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27754 \begin_inset Formula
27756 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27764 \begin_layout Standard
27765 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27766 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27770 \begin_layout Standard
27771 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27772 left side and right side.
27773 If you use the option
27776 \begin_inset space ~
27781 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27782 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27784 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27789 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27790 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27793 \begin_layout Standard
27794 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27795 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27796 is to go inside the brackets.
27797 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27802 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27803 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27804 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27808 arg "math-delim ( )"
27814 \begin_layout Section
27815 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27816 \begin_inset Index idx
27819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27826 \begin_inset Index idx
27829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27836 \begin_inset Index idx
27839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27840 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27848 \begin_layout Standard
27849 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27853 \begin_inset space ~
27861 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27865 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27866 Here is an example:
27867 \begin_inset Formula
27869 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27878 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27879 \begin_inset space ~
27883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27885 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27890 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27891 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27892 This alignment is set in the box
27897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27946 for every column as default.
27947 For example, the sequence
27948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27959 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27960 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27961 corresponds to the relevant column.
27962 The result will look like this:
27963 \begin_inset Formula
27966 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27967 column & has & has\,right\\
27968 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27977 \begin_layout Standard
27978 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27981 arg "newline-insert newline"
27984 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27985 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27987 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27990 or the math toolbar.
27993 \begin_layout Standard
27994 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27995 It can be created with the menu
27997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27998 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28000 \begin_inset space ~
28012 Here is an example:
28013 \begin_inset Formula
28027 \begin_layout Standard
28028 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28031 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28034 arg "newline-insert newline"
28038 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28043 arg "newline-insert newline"
28046 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28054 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28055 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28056 A new row is created by every further entry of
28059 arg "newline-insert newline"
28063 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28064 Here is an example:
28065 \begin_inset Formula
28067 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28068 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28073 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28074 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28075 \begin_inset Formula
28077 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28085 \begin_layout Standard
28086 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28093 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28094 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28097 reference "eq:asquared"
28102 The other types are described in section
28103 \begin_inset space ~
28107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28109 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28116 \begin_layout Section
28117 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28118 \begin_inset Index idx
28121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28122 Math ! Formula numbering
28128 \begin_inset Index idx
28131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28132 Math ! Referencing formulas
28138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28140 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28147 \begin_layout Standard
28148 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28150 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28151 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28153 \begin_inset space ~
28157 \begin_inset space ~
28165 arg "math-number-toggle"
28169 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28170 within parentheses.
28171 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28172 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28173 the document class.
28174 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28175 separated by a dot:
28176 \begin_inset Formula
28186 arg "math-number-toggle"
28189 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28190 You can only number displayed formulas.
28193 \begin_layout Standard
28194 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28196 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28197 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28199 \begin_inset space ~
28203 \begin_inset space ~
28211 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28214 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28215 \begin_inset Formula
28218 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28224 To number all lines use the shortcut
28227 arg "math-number-toggle"
28233 \begin_layout Standard
28234 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28237 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28238 A label is inserted with the menu
28240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28249 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28250 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28251 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28263 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28264 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28265 We inserted in the following example the label
28266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28273 in the second line:
28274 \begin_inset Formula
28276 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28277 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28282 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28283 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28284 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28286 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28288 \begin_inset space ~
28296 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28300 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28301 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28302 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28303 as the formula number:
28306 \begin_layout Standard
28307 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28310 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28317 \begin_layout Standard
28318 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28319 's cross-reference box are described in section
28320 \begin_inset space ~
28324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28326 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28331 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28339 \begin_layout Section
28340 User defined math macros
28341 \begin_inset Index idx
28344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28353 \begin_layout Standard
28355 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28356 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28357 Math macros are explained in section
28360 \begin_inset space ~
28372 \begin_layout Section
28376 \begin_layout Subsection
28378 \begin_inset Index idx
28381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28390 \begin_layout Standard
28391 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28392 To set a font in a formula, use the
28395 \begin_inset space ~
28403 arg "math-insert \\font"
28406 , or enter its command, listed in table
28407 \begin_inset space ~
28411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28413 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28420 \begin_layout Standard
28421 \begin_inset Float table
28428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28429 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28434 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28438 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28448 \begin_inset Tabular
28449 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28450 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28451 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28452 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28484 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28511 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28538 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28571 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28598 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28620 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28626 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28627 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28640 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28656 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28690 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28712 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28718 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28726 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28739 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28755 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28789 \begin_layout Standard
28790 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28798 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28801 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28803 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28807 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28826 \begin_layout Standard
28827 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28828 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28833 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28834 space when you need a space in the box.
28835 Here is an example where
28836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28847 denotes the set of numbers:
28848 \begin_inset Formula
28850 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28858 \begin_layout Standard
28859 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28860 You can, for example, put a character in
28869 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28873 \begin_inset Newline newline
28876 So it is better not to use this feature.
28879 \begin_layout Standard
28880 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28881 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28885 \begin_inset Newline newline
28888 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28894 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28895 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28901 \begin_layout Standard
28908 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28911 \begin_layout Standard
28912 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28914 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28915 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28917 \begin_inset space ~
28925 \begin_layout Subsection
28927 \begin_inset Index idx
28930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28939 \begin_layout Standard
28940 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28942 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28946 \begin_inset space ~
28950 \begin_inset space ~
28958 \begin_inset space ~
28966 arg "math-insert \\font"
28970 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28971 in black instead of blue.
28972 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28973 Here is an example:
28974 \begin_inset Formula
28977 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28978 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28987 \begin_layout Subsection
28989 \begin_inset Index idx
28992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29001 \begin_layout Standard
29002 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29003 automatically chosen in most situations.
29021 For most characters,
29029 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29030 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29035 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29036 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29037 thinks are appropriate.
29038 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29041 arg "math-insert \\style"
29045 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29046 For example, you can set
29047 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29050 , which is normally in
29059 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29063 The four styles are used in the following example:
29066 \begin_layout Standard
29067 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29071 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29075 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29079 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29085 \begin_layout Standard
29086 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29087 is set in a particular size with the menu
29089 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29091 \begin_inset space ~
29096 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29097 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29098 will be adjusted to correspond.
29099 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29110 \begin_layout Standard
29114 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29120 \begin_layout Section
29121 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29123 \begin_inset Index idx
29126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29133 \begin_inset Index idx
29136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29145 \begin_layout Standard
29147 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29148 that are in common use.
29151 \begin_layout Subsection
29152 Enabling AMS-Support
29155 \begin_layout Standard
29156 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29157 the document by selecting the checkbox
29160 \begin_inset space ~
29164 \begin_inset space ~
29168 \begin_inset space ~
29175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29179 \begin_inset Index idx
29182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29183 Document ! Settings
29191 \begin_inset space ~
29197 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29198 -errors in formulas,
29199 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29202 \begin_layout Subsection
29204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29206 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29211 \begin_inset Index idx
29214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29215 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29223 \begin_layout Standard
29224 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29225 provides a selection of different formula types.
29227 allows you to choose between
29248 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29249 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29256 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29259 \begin_layout Chapter
29263 \begin_layout Section
29265 \begin_inset Index idx
29268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29277 name "sec:Cross-References"
29284 \begin_layout Standard
29285 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29286 's strengths is cross-references.
29287 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29289 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29290 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29291 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29294 \begin_layout Enumerate
29298 \begin_layout Enumerate
29299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29301 name "enu:Second-item"
29308 \begin_layout Enumerate
29312 \begin_layout Standard
29313 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29318 or by pressing the toolbar button
29325 A gray label box like this:
29326 \begin_inset Graphics
29327 filename clipart/label.png
29331 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29333 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29368 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29369 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29385 \begin_layout Standard
29386 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29388 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29391 or the toolbar button
29394 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29398 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29399 \begin_inset Graphics
29400 filename clipart/reference.png
29404 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29406 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29419 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29423 \begin_layout Standard
29424 As an alternative to
29426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29429 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29434 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29435 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29437 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29449 \begin_layout Standard
29450 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29451 \begin_inset space ~
29455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29457 reference "enu:Second-item"
29464 \begin_layout Standard
29465 It is recommended to use a protected space
29469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29470 described in section
29471 \begin_inset space ~
29475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29477 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29486 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29487 line breaks between them.
29490 \begin_layout Standard
29491 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29494 \begin_layout Description
29495 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29498 reference "fig:Two-images"
29505 \begin_layout Description
29506 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29507 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29519 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29526 \begin_layout Description
29527 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29528 \begin_inset space ~
29532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29533 LatexCommand pageref
29534 reference "fig:Two-images"
29541 \begin_layout Description
29543 \begin_inset space ~
29547 \begin_inset space ~
29550 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29552 LatexCommand vpageref
29553 reference "fig:Two-images"
29558 \begin_inset Newline newline
29561 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29562 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29563 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29564 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29565 it prints “on the next page”.
29566 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29569 \begin_layout Description
29571 \begin_inset space ~
29575 \begin_inset space ~
29579 \begin_inset space ~
29582 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29585 reference "fig:Two-images"
29590 \begin_inset Newline newline
29593 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29599 ; otherwise it behaves like
29603 \begin_inset space ~
29607 \begin_inset space ~
29616 \begin_layout Description
29618 \begin_inset space ~
29621 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29622 \begin_inset Newline newline
29626 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29634 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29644 \begin_inset Index idx
29647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29649 packages ! prettyref
29655 \begin_inset Index idx
29658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29660 packages ! refstyle
29671 \begin_inset Newline newline
29674 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29675 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29678 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29682 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29683 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29691 is the default and preferred because
29695 supports only English documents.
29696 The format is specified by using the command
29708 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29709 preamble of the document.
29710 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29728 \begin_inset Newline newline
29735 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29740 \begin_inset Newline newline
29751 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29752 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29754 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29755 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29760 , you might do so as follows:
29761 \begin_inset Newline newline
29768 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29773 \begin_inset Newline newline
29776 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29777 the package documentation
29778 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29780 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29786 \begin_inset Newline newline
29797 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29804 \begin_layout Description
29806 \begin_inset space ~
29809 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29811 LatexCommand nameref
29812 reference "fig:Two-images"
29819 \begin_layout Description
29821 \begin_inset space ~
29824 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29825 label for the reference:
29826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29827 LatexCommand labelonly
29828 reference "fig:Two-images"
29833 \begin_inset Newline newline
29836 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29837 Code, if you want to issue a command
29838 that \SpecialChar LyX
29844 , then you may want to use the
29847 \begin_inset space ~
29852 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29862 This is the form needed for e.
29863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29867 \begin_inset space \space{}
29874 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29875 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29877 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29881 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29885 \begin_layout Standard
29886 You can only use the style
29890 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29894 is always possible.
29897 \begin_layout Standard
29898 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29899 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29901 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29902 \begin_inset space ~
29906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29908 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29915 \begin_layout Standard
29916 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29920 \begin_inset space ~
29924 \begin_inset space ~
29929 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29930 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
29931 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
29934 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29937 \begin_inset space ~
29942 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29943 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29946 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29950 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
29951 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
29952 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
29958 \begin_layout Standard
29959 You can change labels at any time.
29960 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29962 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
29964 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
29965 change them all manually
29970 \begin_layout Standard
29971 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29973 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29977 \begin_layout Standard
29978 References are described in detail in the section
29989 \begin_layout Section
29990 Table of Contents and other Listings
29991 \begin_inset Index idx
29994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30001 \begin_inset Index idx
30004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30005 Navigating ! Outline
30011 \begin_inset Index idx
30014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30030 \begin_layout Subsection
30032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30034 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30041 \begin_layout Standard
30042 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30044 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30045 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30047 \begin_inset space ~
30051 \begin_inset space ~
30057 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30059 If you click on it, the
30063 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30064 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30065 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30067 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30069 \begin_inset space ~
30074 that is described in section
30075 \begin_inset space ~
30079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30081 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30088 \begin_layout Standard
30089 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30090 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30092 \begin_inset space ~
30096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30098 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30102 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30104 \begin_inset space ~
30108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30110 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30114 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30116 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30119 \begin_layout Subsection
30120 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30123 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30130 \begin_layout Standard
30131 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30133 You can insert them via the
30135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30136 List/Contents/References
30139 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30142 \begin_layout Section
30143 URLs and Hyperlinks
30144 \begin_inset Index idx
30147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30154 \begin_inset Index idx
30157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30166 \begin_layout Subsection
30168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30177 \begin_layout Standard
30178 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30186 \begin_layout Standard
30187 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30189 \begin_inset Flex URL
30192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30194 https://www.lyx.org
30202 \begin_layout Standard
30203 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30209 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30213 \begin_layout Standard
30214 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30222 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30231 \begin_layout Subsection
30233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30235 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30242 \begin_layout Standard
30243 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30248 or with the toolbar button
30255 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30264 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30265 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30268 name "LyX's homepage"
30269 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30274 , an Email address like this:
30275 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30277 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30278 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30284 , or a link to a file.
30289 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30297 \begin_layout Standard
30298 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30311 to the link target.
30314 \begin_layout Standard
30315 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30316 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30317 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30318 the text style dialog.
30319 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30323 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30325 name "LyX's homepage"
30326 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30334 \begin_layout Standard
30335 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30339 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30341 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30342 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30346 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30348 \begin_inset Newline newline
30356 \begin_inset Newline newline
30363 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30364 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30368 \begin_layout Section
30370 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30372 \begin_inset Index idx
30375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30384 name "sec:Counters"
30391 \begin_layout Standard
30393 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30394 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30395 is its ability to manage counters.
30396 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30397 modify counters directly.
30398 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30400 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30401 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30402 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30403 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30404 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30408 \begin_layout Standard
30410 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30411 There are five commands you can use:
30414 \begin_layout Enumerate
30416 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30417 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30420 \begin_layout Enumerate
30422 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30423 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30424 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30427 \begin_layout Enumerate
30429 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30430 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30433 \begin_layout Enumerate
30435 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30436 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30440 \begin_layout Enumerate
30442 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30443 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30446 \begin_layout Standard
30448 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30449 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30450 those that are available in the current document class.
30455 \begin_layout Section
30457 \begin_inset Index idx
30460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30469 name "sec:Appendices"
30476 \begin_layout Standard
30477 Appendices are created with the menu
30479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30481 \begin_inset space ~
30485 \begin_inset space ~
30491 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30492 as the appendix part of the book.
30493 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30496 \begin_layout Standard
30497 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30498 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30499 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30500 and the subsection number.
30501 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30505 \begin_layout Standard
30507 \begin_inset space ~
30511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30513 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30521 \begin_inset space ~
30525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30527 reference "subsec:Export"
30534 \begin_layout Section
30536 \begin_inset Index idx
30539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30548 name "sec:Bibliography"
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30556 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30558 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30559 \begin_inset space ~
30563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30565 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30572 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30577 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30578 \begin_inset space ~
30582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30584 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30589 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30590 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30591 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30595 using a bibliography database.
30598 \begin_layout Standard
30599 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30600 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30604 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30605 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30606 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30607 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30608 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30611 \begin_layout Subsection
30612 The Bibliography Environment
30613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30615 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30622 \begin_layout Standard
30627 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30629 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30638 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30640 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30641 of ASCII characters only.
30645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30650 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30656 \begin_inset Newline newline
30660 \begin_inset Flex URL
30663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30665 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30675 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30685 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30686 \begin_inset Newline newline
30693 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30694 the number of the entry.
30699 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30708 \begin_layout Standard
30709 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30714 or the toolbar button
30717 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30721 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30722 containing the available citations.
30723 Select one or more keys from the list and
30733 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30734 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30738 \begin_layout Standard
30739 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30740 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30741 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30753 \begin_layout Standard
30757 Companion Second Edition
30760 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30762 key "latexcompanion"
30770 \begin_layout Standard
30771 The \SpecialChar LyX
30772 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30773 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30783 \begin_layout Standard
30784 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30791 \begin_inset Index idx
30794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30803 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30804 the label needs to be given the form
30805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30816 Author A and Author B(Year)
30817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30824 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30831 \begin_inset space ~
30836 in the document settings
30837 \begin_inset Index idx
30840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30841 Document ! Settings
30848 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30850 \begin_inset space ~
30856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30858 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30866 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30868 Once you have done that, the
30872 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30889 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30890 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30891 These two are madatory.
30892 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30895 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30897 ) and in abrreviated form (
30904 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30905 add the abbreviated form to
30909 and the full list to the optional
30917 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30918 If specified like this,
30920 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30921 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30924 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30931 is specified, toggling
30932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30939 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30940 full and abbreviated list
30944 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30945 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30946 the citation references.
30947 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30952 \begin_layout Standard
30953 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30956 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30958 \begin_inset space ~
30966 arg "layout-paragraph"
30970 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30973 \begin_layout Subsection
30974 Bibliography databases
30975 \begin_inset Index idx
30978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30979 Bibliography ! Databases
30985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30987 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30994 \begin_layout Standard
30995 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31001 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31003 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31004 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31009 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31011 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31012 your working field in a database.
31013 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31014 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31015 list for that document.
31016 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31020 \begin_layout Standard
31021 The database is a text file with the file extension
31022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31033 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31034 The format is explained in
31035 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31042 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31044 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31046 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31052 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31053 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31054 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31056 \begin_inset Flex URL
31059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31061 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31069 \begin_layout Standard
31071 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31072 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31073 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31075 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31077 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31078 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31079 Those are addressed by
31084 \begin_inset Index idx
31087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31089 packages ! biblatex
31095 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31096 (although it has been significantly
31097 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31107 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31108 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31109 might conversely fail to correctly
31110 handle databases that use specific
31119 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31123 \begin_layout Standard
31124 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31129 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31131 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31135 \begin_inset Index idx
31138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31139 Document ! Settings
31151 \begin_inset space ~
31156 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31165 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31167 \begin_inset Index idx
31170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31171 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31180 \begin_layout Standard
31181 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31185 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31187 \begin_inset space ~
31193 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31194 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31202 Add bibliography to TOC
31204 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31209 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31210 in the document or just the cited references.
31212 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31217 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31218 differ from the encoding of the document.
31223 \begin_layout Standard
31224 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31225 style file is a text file with the file extension
31226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31237 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31238 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31239 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31240 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31242 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31248 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31249 \begin_inset Newline newline
31253 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31255 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31265 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31270 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31274 \begin_layout Standard
31275 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31278 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31280 \begin_inset Index idx
31283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31284 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31290 \begin_inset Index idx
31293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31295 packages ! biblatex
31303 \begin_layout Standard
31304 Accessing a database via
31308 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31311 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31312 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31314 \begin_inset space ~
31320 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31321 you cannot select a
31326 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31330 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31333 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31334 As for the styles, note the following.
31339 \begin_layout Standard
31344 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31357 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31358 file (text file with the file extension
31359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31370 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31371 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31373 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31377 \begin_layout Standard
31382 styles are not set in the
31385 \begin_inset space ~
31390 dialog, but in the document settings.
31391 \begin_inset Index idx
31394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31395 Document ! Settings
31400 However, in the dialog in the
31404 field, which is only visible if you use
31408 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31409 example how its heading will appear).
31410 These options are described in detail in the
31415 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31425 \begin_layout Standard
31426 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31427 \begin_inset space ~
31431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31433 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31443 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31444 Bibliography Processors
31447 \begin_layout Standard
31448 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31449 uses a bibliography processor,
31450 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31451 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31452 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31454 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31455 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31458 \begin_layout Standard
31459 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31461 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31462 You can do this on a general level in
31464 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31465 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31466 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31469 or for individual documents in
31471 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31472 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31476 The following variants are available by default:
31479 \begin_layout Description
31480 biber a specific, modern processor
31481 \begin_inset Index idx
31484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31491 developed exclusively for
31495 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31501 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31506 makes use of; if you use the
31510 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31517 \begin_layout Description
31518 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31519 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31520 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31524 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31527 \begin_layout Description
31528 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31529 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31533 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31537 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31541 features are supported.
31544 \begin_layout Standard
31545 By default (with the
31551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31552 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31565 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31566 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31567 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31570 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31571 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31584 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31585 -based bibliography styles).
31586 This should suit most needs.
31589 \begin_layout Standard
31590 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31591 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31592 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31597 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31598 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31599 You can adjust it in
31601 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31602 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31603 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31609 \begin_layout Standard
31610 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31611 can add below the selection.
31612 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31613 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31619 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31633 \begin_layout Standard
31635 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31637 These are explained in detail in section
31639 Customizing Bibliographies
31643 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31648 Additional Features
31651 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31655 \begin_layout Subsection
31657 \begin_inset Index idx
31660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31661 Bibliography ! Citation format
31667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31669 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31676 \begin_layout Standard
31677 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31682 \begin_inset space \space{}
31685 numerical citation (as
31686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31693 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31701 ) or author-year citations (as
31702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31711 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31715 \begin_layout Standard
31716 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31720 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31724 \begin_inset Index idx
31727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31728 Document ! Settings
31733 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31739 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31740 labels, is there to use
31743 \begin_inset space ~
31754 \begin_inset space ~
31759 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31762 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31769 \begin_layout Standard
31770 With a bibliography database (see
31771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31773 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31780 ) one has in contrary to the
31784 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31785 These style formats are available:
31788 \begin_layout Description
31790 \begin_inset space ~
31793 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31794 -based approached without any additional packages
31795 (simple numeric citations).
31798 \begin_layout Description
31799 Biblatex loads the package
31804 \begin_inset Index idx
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31809 packages ! biblatex
31814 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31816 Biblatex citation style
31820 Biblatex bibliography style
31823 Options to the package
31827 can be entered in the
31834 \begin_layout Description
31836 \begin_inset space ~
31840 \begin_inset space ~
31843 mode) loads the package
31847 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31848 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31860 behavior very closely.
31865 this option has some additional styles.
31870 styles are also supported by this variant.
31873 \begin_layout Description
31875 \begin_inset space ~
31878 (BibTeX) loads the package
31883 \begin_inset Index idx
31886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31893 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31896 \begin_layout Description
31898 \begin_inset space ~
31901 (BibTeX) loads the package
31906 \begin_inset Index idx
31909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31916 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31919 \begin_layout Standard
31928 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31930 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31939 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31941 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31942 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31944 Biblatex citation style
31947 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31953 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31957 \begin_layout Standard
31958 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31959 are available in the
31964 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31965 a name prefix such as
31966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31981 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31986 \begin_inset space \space{}
31990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32001 \begin_layout Standard
32002 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32008 \begin_inset space \space{}
32011 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32017 \begin_inset space \space{}
32021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32033 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32037 \begin_inset space ~
32045 \begin_inset space ~
32051 Here is a simple example where the text
32052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32056 \begin_inset space ~
32060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32063 appears after the reference:
32066 \begin_layout Quote
32068 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32071 key "latexcompanion"
32079 \begin_layout Standard
32080 All styles except for
32084 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32094 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32098 \begin_layout Standard
32099 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32100 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32101 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32106 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32107 multi-citation (so-called
32108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32111 qualified citation lists
32112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32118 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32123 dialog will display three columns in the field
32130 \begin_inset space ~
32138 \begin_inset space ~
32146 \begin_inset space ~
32152 If you double-click on an item's
32155 \begin_inset space ~
32163 \begin_inset space ~
32168 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32171 General text before
32177 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32180 \begin_layout Subsection
32182 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32185 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32189 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32193 \begin_layout Standard
32195 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32197 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32200 \begin_inset space ~
32204 \begin_inset space ~
32208 \begin_inset space ~
32212 \begin_inset space ~
32215 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32218 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32221 \begin_layout Itemize
32223 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32224 If citation entries include any of the fields
32225 \begin_inset Flex Code
32228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32230 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32239 \begin_inset Flex Code
32242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32244 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32252 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
32253 \begin_inset Flex Code
32256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32258 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32266 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32267 \begin_inset Flex Code
32270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32272 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32280 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32283 \begin_layout Itemize
32285 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32286 If citation entries include any of the fields
32287 \begin_inset Flex Code
32290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32292 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32300 (filled by JabRef) or
32301 \begin_inset Flex Code
32304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32306 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32314 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32315 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32316 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32319 \begin_layout Standard
32321 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
32322 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32323 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32326 Search drive for cited files
32330 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32331 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32332 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32333 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32337 It uses the tokens supplied at
32341 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32342 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
32343 arbitrary position).
32345 opens the first matching file it finds.
32346 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
32347 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
32348 the chance this works for you.
32353 \begin_layout Standard
32355 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32356 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32357 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32359 \begin_inset Flex Code
32362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32364 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32373 \begin_inset Flex Code
32376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32378 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32386 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32390 Cite format description
32397 \begin_layout Section
32399 \begin_inset Index idx
32402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32418 \begin_layout Standard
32419 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32423 \begin_inset space ~
32428 or the toolbar button
32435 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32436 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32437 by \SpecialChar LyX
32438 as the index entry.
32441 \begin_layout Standard
32442 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32445 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32447 \begin_inset space ~
32453 A light blue box labeled
32454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32465 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32466 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32470 \begin_layout Standard
32471 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32472 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32473 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32474 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32476 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32478 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32486 \begin_layout Subsection
32487 Grouping Index Entries
32488 \begin_inset Index idx
32491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32500 \begin_layout Standard
32501 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32503 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32504 lists under the entry
32505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32513 First we create the entry
32514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32522 \begin_inset space ~
32526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32528 reference "subsec:Lists"
32533 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32534 \begin_inset space ~
32538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32540 reference "sec:Itemize"
32544 , we insert the command
32547 \begin_layout Standard
32553 \begin_layout Standard
32557 \begin_layout Standard
32563 \begin_layout Standard
32564 for the enumerated list in section
32565 \begin_inset space ~
32569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32571 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32578 \begin_layout Standard
32579 The exclamation mark
32580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32587 marks the grouping levels.
32588 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32589 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32590 If we don't have an index entry for
32591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32598 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32601 \begin_layout Subsection
32603 \begin_inset Index idx
32606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32607 Index ! Page ranges
32615 \begin_layout Standard
32616 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32618 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32619 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32620 an index entry in section
32621 \begin_inset space ~
32625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32627 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32634 \begin_layout Standard
32637 Paragraph environments|(
32640 \begin_layout Standard
32641 and another entry at the end of section
32642 \begin_inset space ~
32646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32648 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32655 \begin_layout Standard
32658 Paragraph environments|)
32661 \begin_layout Standard
32663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32686 respectively start and end the index range.
32687 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32688 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32689 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32690 An example is the index entry
32691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32694 Document ! Settings
32695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32701 \begin_layout Subsection
32703 \begin_inset Index idx
32706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32707 Index ! Cross referencing
32715 \begin_layout Standard
32716 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32717 We referred for example in the index entry
32718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32726 \begin_inset space ~
32730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32732 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32736 ) to the index entry
32737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32744 in the same section using the entry
32747 \begin_layout Standard
32750 GIF|see{Image formats}
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32754 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32756 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32757 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32760 \begin_layout Subsection
32762 \begin_inset Index idx
32765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32766 Index ! Entry order
32774 \begin_layout Standard
32775 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32776 follow the rules for the index order.
32777 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32783 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32785 \begin_inset space ~
32789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32791 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32800 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32801 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32826 \begin_inset Index idx
32829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32830 Dummy entries ! maïs
32836 \begin_inset Index idx
32839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32840 Dummy entries ! maître
32846 \begin_inset Index idx
32849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32850 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32855 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32856 maïs, maison, maître.
32857 To achieve this, we use the command
32860 \begin_layout Standard
32863 previous entry@current entry
32866 \begin_layout Standard
32867 In our case we want to have
32868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32883 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32886 \begin_layout Standard
32892 \begin_layout Standard
32893 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32894 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32896 See the next subsection for an example.
32899 \begin_layout Subsection
32901 \begin_inset Index idx
32904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32905 Index ! Entry layout
32913 \begin_layout Standard
32914 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32915 \begin_inset Index idx
32918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32921 This is an italic dummy entry
32926 You can also format the page number using the character
32927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32934 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32935 -command without a backslash.
32936 We can write for example
32939 \begin_layout Standard
32942 italic page number:|textit
32945 \begin_layout Standard
32946 to get the page number in italic.
32947 \begin_inset Index idx
32950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32951 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32956 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32957 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32975 \begin_inset space ~
32981 Have a look at section
32982 \begin_inset space ~
32986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32988 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32992 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32996 \begin_layout Standard
32997 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33005 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33009 to generate the index, see section
33010 \begin_inset space ~
33014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33016 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33025 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33030 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33031 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33034 key "latexcompanion"
33047 \begin_layout Standard
33048 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33050 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33051 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33052 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33053 If so, put the following in the preamble
33056 \begin_layout Standard
33068 \begin_layout Standard
33072 \begin_layout Standard
33078 \begin_layout Standard
33079 in the index entry.
33080 \begin_inset Index idx
33083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33084 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33089 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33090 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33091 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33094 \begin_layout Standard
33095 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33096 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33097 a bold font for all index entries.
33098 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33110 documentation for details,
33111 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33113 key "makeindex,xindy"
33121 \begin_layout Subsection
33123 \begin_inset Index idx
33126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33135 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33142 \begin_layout Standard
33143 If the index generation program
33147 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33148 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33152 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33153 distribution, is used.
33157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33162 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33163 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33164 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33165 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33166 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33176 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33178 dialog, see section
33179 \begin_inset space ~
33183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33185 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33190 The available options are listed and explained in
33191 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33193 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33199 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33203 \begin_layout Standard
33204 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33205 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33208 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33209 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33213 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33214 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33217 \begin_layout Subsection
33221 \begin_layout Standard
33222 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33223 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33231 next to the standard index.
33233 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33234 that add this feature.
33241 \begin_inset Index idx
33244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33246 packages ! splitidx
33251 package to generate multiple indexes.
33252 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33258 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33268 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33269 style, but it also includes
33270 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33271 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33279 \begin_layout Standard
33280 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33281 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33284 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33287 and select the option
33289 Use multiple Indexes
33296 already contains the standard index
33297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33305 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33306 also appear as a heading) to the
33310 input field and press the
33315 The new index now also appears in the list.
33316 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33317 label color to the new index.
33320 \begin_layout Standard
33321 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33324 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33325 List/Contents/References
33331 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33332 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33333 are additional features:
33336 \begin_layout Itemize
33337 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33338 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33341 \begin_layout Itemize
33342 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33343 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33348 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33349 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33350 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33351 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33354 \begin_layout Itemize
33359 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33360 code in the name of the index.
33363 \begin_layout Section
33364 Nomenclature/Glossary
33365 \begin_inset Index idx
33368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33375 \begin_inset Index idx
33378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33409 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33416 \begin_layout Standard
33417 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33418 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33419 called nomenclature or glossary.
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33423 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33430 \begin_inset Index idx
33433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33441 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33443 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33450 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33454 \begin_layout Standard
33455 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33456 and then use the menu
33458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33464 \begin_inset space ~
33469 or the toolbar button
33472 arg "nomencl-insert"
33477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33488 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33491 \begin_layout Standard
33492 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33493 The first is the term or
33497 that you wish to define.
33502 of the term or symbol.
33505 \begin_layout Standard
33506 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33514 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33515 code for nomenclature entries the option
33519 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33527 \begin_layout Subsection
33528 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33529 \begin_inset Index idx
33532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33533 Nomenclature ! Layout
33541 \begin_layout Standard
33542 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33546 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33553 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33561 \begin_inset Newline newline
33569 \begin_inset Newline newline
33575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33582 character starts/ends the formula.
33583 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33584 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33596 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33606 \begin_layout Standard
33607 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33608 syntax is given in section
33609 \begin_inset space ~
33613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33615 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33622 \begin_layout Standard
33626 \begin_inset space ~
33631 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33633 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33638 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33645 in this document is:
33646 \begin_inset Newline newline
33651 dummy entry for the character
33656 \begin_inset Newline newline
33668 \begin_inset space ~
33678 font use the command
33707 \begin_layout Standard
33708 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33713 \begin_inset space \space{}
33717 \begin_inset Newline newline
33733 \begin_inset Newline newline
33736 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33737 This command will make the font of all symbols
33744 \begin_inset space ~
33752 \begin_layout Standard
33753 If the characters |
33754 \begin_inset space \space{}
33758 \begin_inset space \space{}
33762 \begin_inset space \space{}
33766 \begin_inset space \space{}
33770 \begin_inset space \space{}
33773 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33774 code they need to be escaped
33775 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33776 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33777 LatexCommand nomenclature
33778 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33779 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33787 \begin_layout Subsection
33788 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33789 \begin_inset Index idx
33792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33793 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33801 \begin_layout Standard
33802 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33803 -code of the symbol
33805 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33807 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33810 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33811 LatexCommand nomenclature
33813 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33821 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33825 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33826 LatexCommand nomenclature
33829 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33835 They will be sorted by
33836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33862 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33865 will be sorted before the
33869 since the character
33870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33877 is considered in sorting.
33880 \begin_layout Standard
33881 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33884 \begin_inset space ~
33889 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33890 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33892 For the example given, you can insert
33896 in this field for the
33897 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33904 will be located before
33905 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33911 \begin_layout Standard
33912 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33917 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33927 \begin_layout Subsection
33928 Nomenclature Options
33929 \begin_inset Index idx
33932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33933 Nomenclature ! Options
33939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33941 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33948 \begin_layout Standard
33953 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33954 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33957 \begin_layout Description
33958 refeq Appends the phrase
33959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33974 to every nomenclature entry, where
33980 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33983 \begin_layout Description
33984 refpage Appends the phrase
33985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34000 to every nomenclature entry, where
34006 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34009 \begin_layout Description
34010 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34013 \begin_layout Standard
34014 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34015 class options list in the
34017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34021 In this document the options
34028 \begin_layout Standard
34029 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34035 \begin_layout Standard
34036 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34037 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34042 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34045 \begin_layout Description
34055 \begin_layout Description
34058 nomrefpage Like the
34065 \begin_layout Description
34068 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34077 \begin_layout Description
34081 \begin_inset space ~
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34092 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34095 \begin_layout Standard
34097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34104 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34105 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34109 \begin_layout Standard
34118 \begin_inset Newline newline
34124 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34140 unskip, see equation
34143 \begin_inset Newline newline
34150 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34151 \begin_inset Newline newline
34157 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34161 \begin_inset space ~
34178 \begin_layout Standard
34179 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34182 \begin_inset space ~
34187 in the document settings under
34190 \begin_inset space ~
34198 \begin_layout Standard
34206 \begin_inset Newline newline
34210 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34214 \begin_inset space ~
34226 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34228 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34229 \begin_inset Newline newline
34236 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34237 \begin_inset Newline newline
34241 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34245 \begin_inset space ~
34257 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34262 \begin_layout Subsection
34263 Printing the Nomenclature
34264 \begin_inset Index idx
34267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34268 Nomenclature ! Printing
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34277 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34279 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34280 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34296 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34297 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34298 You can choose between these settings:
34301 \begin_layout Description
34302 Default a space of 1
34303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34309 \begin_layout Description
34311 \begin_inset space ~
34315 \begin_inset space ~
34318 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34321 \begin_layout Description
34322 Custom custom space
34325 \begin_layout Standard
34326 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34335 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34343 For example, in order to change the name to
34347 , add the following line to the preamble:
34350 \begin_layout Standard
34363 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34367 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34368 \begin_inset Newline newline
34383 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34386 \begin_layout Subsection
34387 Nomenclature Program
34388 \begin_inset Index idx
34391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34392 Nomenclature ! Program
34398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34400 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34407 \begin_layout Standard
34413 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34414 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34416 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34421 by adding options, see section
34422 \begin_inset space ~
34426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34428 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34433 The available options are listed and explained in
34434 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34436 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34444 \begin_layout Section
34446 \begin_inset Index idx
34449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34456 \begin_inset Index idx
34459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34460 Document ! Branches
34466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34468 name "sec:Branches"
34475 \begin_layout Standard
34476 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34477 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34478 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34479 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34482 \begin_layout Standard
34483 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34484 allows you to put text into branches.
34485 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34486 To create a branch, either select the menu
34488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34489 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34492 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34501 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34502 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34503 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34504 and whether the name of the branch should
34505 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34506 (see below for an example).
34507 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34508 to the name of the other) and to add
34509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34521 \begin_inset space ~
34524 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34525 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34528 \begin_layout Standard
34529 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34530 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34535 where you can choose a branch.
34536 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34540 \begin_layout Standard
34541 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34542 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34545 \begin_layout Standard
34546 \begin_inset Branch Question
34550 \begin_layout Standard
34555 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34563 \begin_layout Standard
34564 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34568 \begin_layout Standard
34573 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34581 \begin_layout Standard
34588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34589 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34592 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34593 Consider for example a file
34594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34601 which has the above branches.
34603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34610 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34634 branch were inactive,
34635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34650 branch was active, likewise
34651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34666 branch was active, and
34667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34670 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34674 if both branches were active.
34675 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34676 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34682 \begin_layout Standard
34683 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34689 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34690 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34694 \begin_inset space ~
34702 \begin_layout Standard
34703 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34707 \begin_layout Standard
34713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34720 branch is deactivated.
34726 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34732 \begin_layout Standard
34733 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34734 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34735 definitions for each branch.
34736 For example you can define for the question branch
34740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34741 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34742 -syntax, see section
34743 \begin_inset space ~
34747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34749 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34761 \begin_layout Standard
34771 \begin_layout Standard
34781 \begin_layout Standard
34782 and for the answer branch
34785 \begin_layout Standard
34795 \begin_layout Standard
34805 \begin_layout Standard
34806 \begin_inset Branch Question
34810 \begin_layout Standard
34814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34842 \begin_layout Standard
34843 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34847 \begin_layout Standard
34851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34879 \begin_layout Standard
34880 Now it is possible to use the
34884 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34891 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34894 commands to obtain conditional output.
34895 Here is an example formula where only the
34902 \begin_inset Formula
34904 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34912 \begin_layout Standard
34913 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34921 \begin_layout Standard
34922 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34928 \begin_inset space \space{}
34931 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34933 For this advanced usage, see the
34939 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34944 \begin_layout Section
34946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34948 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34953 \begin_inset Index idx
34956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34965 \begin_layout Standard
34968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34969 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34972 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34974 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34980 \begin_inset Index idx
34983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34985 packages ! hyperref
34990 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34991 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34992 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34993 part of the document.
34996 \begin_layout Standard
34997 The header information in the dialog tab
35001 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35002 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35003 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35004 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35008 \begin_inset space ~
35012 \begin_inset space ~
35017 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35018 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35019 and author entries.
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35027 \begin_inset space ~
35031 \begin_inset space ~
35036 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35039 \begin_layout Standard
35040 You can specify in the dialog tab
35044 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35049 \begin_inset space ~
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35057 \begin_inset space ~
35062 option allows long links to be split;
35065 \begin_inset space ~
35069 \begin_inset space ~
35073 \begin_inset space ~
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35086 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35089 \begin_inset space ~
35094 colors the different links.
35095 The default colors are:
35098 \begin_layout Labeling
35099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35104 for hyperlinks and URLs
35107 \begin_layout Labeling
35108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35116 \begin_layout Labeling
35117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35125 \begin_layout Standard
35126 but you can change these in the field
35131 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35134 \begin_layout Standard
35137 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35140 \begin_layout Standard
35145 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35146 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35147 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35150 \begin_layout Standard
35155 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35156 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35157 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35167 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35168 when opening the PDF.
35170 \begin_inset space ~
35173 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35174 \begin_inset space ~
35177 1 will only display the sections.
35180 \begin_layout Standard
35181 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35182 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35188 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35189 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35199 \begin_layout Section
35201 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35205 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35212 \begin_layout Subsection
35215 \begin_inset Index idx
35218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35228 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35235 \begin_layout Standard
35236 As \SpecialChar LyX
35237 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35238 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35239 commands and constructs,
35242 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35243 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35244 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35245 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35246 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35247 cannot support all packages and
35251 \begin_layout Standard
35252 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35253 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35254 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35258 Code box is created by the menu
35260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35262 \begin_inset space ~
35267 or by the toolbar button
35280 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35288 \begin_layout Standard
35289 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35291 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35293 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35298 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35303 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35310 , you can write the command part
35316 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35317 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35321 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35322 Code box behind the word.
35323 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35324 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35328 \begin_layout Standard
35329 \begin_inset Graphics
35330 filename clipart/ERT.png
35338 \begin_layout Standard
35342 \begin_layout Standard
35343 This is a line with a
35347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35370 \begin_layout Standard
35371 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35379 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35380 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35381 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35382 know that the command is finished.
35390 \begin_layout Subsection
35391 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35393 \begin_inset Argument 1
35396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35397 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35404 \begin_inset Index idx
35407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35417 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35424 \begin_layout Standard
35425 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35426 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35427 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35428 uses in the background.
35429 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35430 is based on commands, you can
35431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35439 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35440 any time if you know the right commands.
35441 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35442 is the end of the day.
35443 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35444 all caption labels bold.
35445 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35447 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35451 \begin_layout Standard
35452 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35454 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35456 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35459 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35469 \begin_layout Standard
35470 As result you find that the package
35475 \begin_inset Index idx
35478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35486 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35491 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35495 \begin_inset space ~
35503 \begin_layout Standard
35508 usepackage[options]{package name}
35511 \begin_layout Standard
35512 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35513 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35514 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35515 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35518 \begin_layout Standard
35519 In your case the package name is
35524 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35529 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35530 So you add the command
35533 \begin_layout Standard
35538 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35542 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35547 For more commands provided by the
35551 package, have a look at its documentation,
35552 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35567 \begin_layout Standard
35568 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35570 For example if you use a
35574 class, you don't need the package
35578 , you can instead write
35581 \begin_layout Standard
35586 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35591 \begin_layout Standard
35592 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35593 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35594 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35601 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35605 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35606 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35608 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35609 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35610 Code box as described in the previous
35614 \begin_layout Standard
35615 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35616 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35619 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35621 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35629 \begin_layout Standard
35630 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35636 \begin_layout Standard
35640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35650 \begin_inset Note Note
35653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35654 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35662 \begin_layout Left Header
35663 \begin_inset Argument 1
35666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35686 \begin_inset Note Note
35689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35690 defines the header line as described below
35698 \begin_layout Center Header
35699 \begin_inset Argument 1
35702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35711 \begin_layout Right Header
35712 \begin_inset Argument 1
35715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35736 \begin_layout Left Footer
35737 \begin_inset Argument 1
35740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35761 \begin_layout Center Footer
35762 \begin_inset Argument 1
35765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35777 \begin_inset Newline newline
35781 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35787 \begin_layout Right Footer
35788 \begin_inset Argument 1
35791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35813 \begin_layout Section
35814 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35817 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35822 \begin_inset Index idx
35825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35826 Document ! Header/Footer line
35832 \begin_inset Index idx
35835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35844 \begin_layout Standard
35845 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35866 \begin_inset space ~
35872 As a second step add in the menu
35874 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35875 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35884 Custom Header/Footerlines
35887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35891 This module offers the following 6
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35898 \begin_layout Description
35900 \begin_inset space ~
35904 \begin_inset space ~
35908 \begin_inset space ~
35912 \begin_inset space ~
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35922 \begin_layout Description
35924 \begin_inset space ~
35928 \begin_inset space ~
35932 \begin_inset space ~
35936 \begin_inset space ~
35940 \begin_inset space ~
35946 \begin_layout Standard
35947 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35948 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35951 \begin_layout Standard
35952 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35953 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35955 \begin_inset space ~
35959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35961 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35965 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35968 \begin_layout Standard
35969 \begin_inset Float figure
35976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35979 \begin_inset Tabular
35980 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35981 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35982 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35983 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35984 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35986 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36004 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36015 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36033 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36044 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36048 The normal text on the page goes here.
36049 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36051 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36052 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36057 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36066 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36077 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36095 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36106 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36124 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36142 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36147 name "fig:Page-layout"
36151 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36164 \begin_layout Standard
36165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36173 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36177 \begin_inset space ~
36182 is set to “Default”.
36183 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36192 \begin_layout Subsection
36196 \begin_layout Standard
36197 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36198 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36199 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36200 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36202 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36204 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36207 \begin_layout Standard
36208 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36209 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36215 \begin_inset space ~
36223 \begin_layout Description
36226 thepage prints the current page number
36229 \begin_layout Description
36232 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36235 \begin_layout Description
36238 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36241 \begin_layout Description
36244 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36245 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36252 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36255 because it usually goes in a left header.
36258 \begin_layout Description
36261 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36262 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36264 It is normally used in the right header.
36267 \begin_layout Subsection
36268 Default header/footer
36271 \begin_layout Standard
36272 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36273 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36274 footer has the page number.
36275 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36276 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36277 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36280 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_layout Subsection
36292 \begin_layout Standard
36293 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36294 Some pages are different.
36295 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36296 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36297 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36298 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36299 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36303 Header and footer decoration line
36306 \begin_layout Standard
36307 By default, you get a 0.4
36308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36311 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36312 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36324 in the following way:
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36334 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36337 \begin_layout Standard
36338 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36351 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36358 \begin_layout Standard
36359 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36361 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36362 \begin_inset space ~
36366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36377 Several header/footer lines
36380 \begin_layout Standard
36381 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36382 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36383 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36385 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36400 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36401 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36411 \begin_layout Standard
36418 headheight}{height}
36421 \begin_layout Standard
36426 is a size in standard units (e.
36427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36431 \begin_inset space \space{}
36439 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36440 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36441 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36442 logfile with the menu
36444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36446 \begin_inset space ~
36454 \begin_inset space ~
36459 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36464 \begin_inset Index idx
36467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36469 packages ! fancyhdr
36475 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36476 for your header/footer.
36479 \begin_layout Subsection
36483 \begin_layout Standard
36484 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36485 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36486 This example consists of the following definition:
36489 \begin_layout Description
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36500 , empty optional argument
36503 \begin_layout Description
36505 \begin_inset space ~
36508 Header empty, empty optional argument
36511 \begin_layout Description
36513 \begin_inset space ~
36522 in the optional argument
36525 \begin_layout Description
36527 \begin_inset space ~
36536 in the optional argument
36539 \begin_layout Description
36541 \begin_inset space ~
36554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36558 \begin_inset Newline newline
36562 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36569 in the optional argument
36572 \begin_layout Description
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36583 , empty optional argument
36586 \begin_layout Description
36589 headrulewidth set to 2
36590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36596 \begin_layout Standard
36597 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36598 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36604 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36614 \begin_layout Standard
36615 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36621 \begin_layout Standard
36625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36629 pagestyle{headings}
36635 \begin_inset Note Note
36638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36639 switches back to page style with the default headings
36647 \begin_layout Section
36648 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36651 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36656 \begin_inset Index idx
36659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36666 \begin_inset Index idx
36669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36678 \begin_layout Standard
36680 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36681 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36682 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36685 \begin_layout Subsection
36689 \begin_layout Standard
36690 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36696 \begin_inset Index idx
36699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36701 packages ! preview-latex
36706 (on some systems named simply
36711 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36713 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36720 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36722 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36730 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36731 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36732 -package are automatically
36733 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36737 \begin_layout Subsection
36741 \begin_layout Standard
36742 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36743 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36745 activate the option
36748 \begin_inset space ~
36755 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36761 \begin_inset space ~
36765 \begin_inset space ~
36768 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36775 \begin_inset space ~
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36793 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36796 \begin_layout Standard
36797 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36802 \begin_inset space ~
36810 \begin_inset space ~
36818 \begin_layout Standard
36819 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36820 and when you finish
36824 \begin_layout Standard
36825 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36833 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36834 generated by activating the option
36837 \begin_inset space ~
36843 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36851 \begin_layout Subsection
36852 Selected document parts
36855 \begin_layout Standard
36856 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36857 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36858 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36859 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36861 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36863 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36867 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36868 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36869 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36872 \begin_layout Standard
36873 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36880 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36892 is explained in section
36894 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36899 \begin_inset space ~
36909 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36910 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36911 the final rotated boxes,
36912 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36913 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36915 Here is the result:
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36919 \begin_inset Preview
36921 \begin_layout Standard
36926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36930 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36936 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36946 height_special "totalheight"
36951 backgroundcolor "none"
36954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36979 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36985 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 Previewing works also for colors.
37009 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37028 is explained in section
37035 \begin_inset space ~
37048 \begin_layout Standard
37049 \begin_inset Preview
37051 \begin_layout Standard
37055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37074 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37079 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37098 \begin_layout Standard
37099 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37105 \begin_layout Standard
37106 If \SpecialChar LyX
37107 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37108 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37109 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37110 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37111 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37112 the \SpecialChar TeX
37114 If \SpecialChar LyX
37115 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37116 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37118 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37119 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37120 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37123 \begin_layout Subsection
37128 \begin_layout Standard
37129 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37130 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37133 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37135 \begin_inset space ~
37140 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37142 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37144 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37145 's main window, then only this selection
37146 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37147 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37148 the source view window.
37153 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37154 ; but note that if you have
37155 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37157 not just the one which is open at the time.
37160 \begin_layout Section
37161 Advanced Find and Replace
37162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37164 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37169 \begin_inset Index idx
37172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37179 \begin_inset Index idx
37182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37191 \begin_layout Subsection
37195 \begin_layout Standard
37196 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37197 allows for searching of complex,
37198 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37200 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37201 The key-features are:
37204 \begin_layout Itemize
37205 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37206 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37207 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37211 \begin_layout Itemize
37212 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37213 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37214 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37215 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37218 \begin_layout Itemize
37219 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37220 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37221 outside of mathematics environments
37224 \begin_layout Itemize
37225 Search may be widened to a specific
37230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37237 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37238 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37245 \begin_layout Itemize
37246 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37247 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37255 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37258 \begin_layout Subsection
37262 \begin_layout Standard
37263 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37265 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37278 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37281 ) or the toolbar button
37284 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37290 Advanced Find and Replace
37295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37299 \begin_layout Standard
37305 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37309 \begin_inset space ~
37314 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37317 arg "paragraph-break"
37321 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37322 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37326 arg "paragraph-break"
37329 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37333 searches backwards.
37336 \begin_layout Standard
37340 \begin_inset space ~
37345 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37359 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37363 Searching for mathematics
37366 \begin_layout Standard
37367 Mathematical formulas, such as
37368 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37371 or something more complex like
37372 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37375 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37380 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37381 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37382 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37383 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37393 \begin_layout Standard
37394 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37395 This is done by switching to the
37399 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37404 This way, entering in the
37411 \begin_layout Itemize
37412 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37413 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37416 \begin_layout Itemize
37417 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37418 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37421 \begin_layout Itemize
37422 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37423 of it only within section headings.
37424 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37425 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37429 \begin_layout Itemize
37430 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37431 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37434 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37438 \begin_layout Standard
37439 The entries made in the
37443 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37446 \begin_inset space ~
37452 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37456 button or alternatively press
37459 arg "paragraph-break"
37466 while the cursor is in the
37469 \begin_inset space ~
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37478 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37480 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37484 \begin_layout Itemize
37485 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37486 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37494 with its typewriter version
37495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37509 \begin_layout Itemize
37510 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37516 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37528 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37535 (you may want to enable the
37538 \begin_inset space ~
37546 \begin_inset space ~
37551 options and disable the
37559 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37567 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37568 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37572 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37575 , or occurrences of
37576 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37580 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37586 \begin_layout Subsection
37590 \begin_layout Standard
37591 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37596 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37598 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37600 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37610 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37616 This is done with the context menu
37618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37619 Insert Regular Expression
37621 while the cursor is in the
37626 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37627 expression matching rules
37631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37632 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37639 \begin_inset space ~
37642 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37643 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37649 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37650 same text in the document.
37651 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37652 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37655 \begin_layout Enumerate
37656 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37661 editor the fraction
37662 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37666 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37669 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37670 fractions with the given denominator.
37673 \begin_layout Enumerate
37674 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37686 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37691 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37692 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37693 Also, by inserting a
37694 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37697 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37698 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37701 \begin_layout Standard
37702 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37703 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37704 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37707 , and referring back to them through
37708 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37712 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37716 For example, try searching with the regexp
37717 \begin_inset Newline newline
37720 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37723 \begin_inset Newline newline
37726 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37729 \begin_layout Standard
37730 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37733 \begin_layout Standard
37734 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37742 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37743 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37744 sub-expressions is absolute.
37746 \begin_inset space ~
37750 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37753 always refers to the first occurrence of
37754 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37757 in all entered regexps.
37765 \begin_layout Section
37767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37769 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37774 \begin_inset Index idx
37777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37786 \begin_layout Standard
37788 has a built-in spell checker.
37791 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37798 key or the toolbar button
37801 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37804 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37805 beginning of the currently selected text.
37806 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37807 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37808 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37809 scrolled so that it is visible.
37810 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37811 n, if any could be found.
37812 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37816 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37817 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37820 \begin_layout Standard
37821 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37824 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37828 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37829 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37831 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37832 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37835 \begin_inset space ~
37843 arg "dialog-show character"
37846 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37848 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37851 \begin_layout Standard
37852 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37853 can be downloaded from here:
37854 \begin_inset Newline newline
37858 \begin_inset Flex URL
37861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37863 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37869 \begin_inset Newline newline
37873 \begin_inset space ~
37876 files for each language.
37877 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37878 \begin_inset space ~
37881 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37882 's installation subfolder
37890 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37892 \begin_inset Newline newline
37895 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37896 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37897 but in most cases these are
37913 is the language code.
37916 \begin_layout Subsection
37920 \begin_layout Standard
37923 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37924 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37926 \begin_inset space ~
37929 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37932 you can set the following things:
37935 \begin_layout Description
37937 \begin_inset space ~
37940 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37941 should use for spell checking.
37942 Depending on your platform,
37952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37953 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37954 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37969 \begin_inset space ~
37972 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37975 \begin_layout Description
37977 \begin_inset space ~
37980 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37981 will always use the given language
37982 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37985 \begin_layout Description
37987 \begin_inset space ~
37990 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37996 \begin_inset space \space{}
38000 This should normally not be needed.
38003 \begin_layout Description
38005 \begin_inset space ~
38009 \begin_inset space ~
38012 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38024 \begin_layout Description
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38029 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38030 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38031 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38032 appear in a context menu.
38033 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38037 \begin_layout Description
38039 \begin_inset space ~
38043 \begin_inset space ~
38047 \begin_inset space ~
38050 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38054 \begin_layout Section
38056 \begin_inset Index idx
38059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38068 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38075 \begin_layout Standard
38077 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38078 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38088 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38090 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38100 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38102 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38103 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38104 which are available for many languages.
38107 \begin_layout Standard
38108 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38109 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38113 \begin_layout Subsection
38114 Setting up the thesaurus
38117 \begin_layout Standard
38126 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38130 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38135 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38141 \begin_inset space ~
38149 For instance, the US English files are named:
38152 \begin_layout Itemize
38156 \begin_layout Itemize
38160 \begin_layout Standard
38169 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38170 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38173 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38174 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38175 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38177 \begin_inset space ~
38182 ) to the path where they are installed.
38186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38187 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38188 ies, typical locations are
38194 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38198 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38202 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38205 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38211 LibreOffice-<Version>
38218 On the Mac, the default location is
38220 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38221 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38222 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38223 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38224 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38225 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38233 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38234 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38235 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38239 \begin_layout Standard
38240 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38241 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
38243 \begin_inset Newline newline
38247 \begin_inset Flex URL
38250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38252 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38260 \begin_layout Standard
38261 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38262 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38264 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38265 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38266 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38268 \begin_inset space ~
38273 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38275 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38276 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38280 \begin_layout Standard
38281 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38283 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38286 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38292 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38295 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38296 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38304 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38305 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38306 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38308 \begin_inset space ~
38313 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38316 \begin_layout Subsection
38317 Using the thesaurus
38320 \begin_layout Standard
38321 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38323 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38326 or the toolbar button
38329 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38332 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38334 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38336 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38337 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38338 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38347 ), related terms (such as
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38359 ), compounds (such as
38362 \begin_inset space ~
38371 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38380 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38383 \begin_layout Standard
38384 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38385 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38389 \begin_layout Standard
38390 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38391 the dictionary, such as the above
38395 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38400 \begin_inset space \space{}
38403 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38404 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38405 For example, looking up the word form
38409 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38414 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38419 \begin_inset space \space{}
38430 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38431 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38432 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38435 \begin_layout Section
38437 \begin_inset Index idx
38440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38447 \begin_inset Index idx
38450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38451 Document ! Change Tracking
38457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38459 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38466 \begin_layout Standard
38467 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38468 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38469 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38470 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38472 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38474 \begin_inset space ~
38477 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38479 \begin_inset space ~
38487 \begin_layout Standard
38488 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38502 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38503 You can change the color in
38505 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38506 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38508 \begin_inset space ~
38512 \begin_inset space ~
38517 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38523 \begin_inset Index idx
38526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38527 Color ! Change tracking
38532 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38533 's status bar when the
38534 cursor is in changed text.
38535 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38538 arg "changes-merge"
38544 \begin_layout Standard
38545 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38547 \begin_inset Index idx
38550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38559 \begin_layout Standard
38560 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38566 \begin_layout Standard
38567 \begin_inset Graphics
38568 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38576 \begin_layout Standard
38577 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38583 \begin_layout Standard
38584 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38587 \begin_layout Standard
38588 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38594 \begin_layout Standard
38595 \begin_inset Tabular
38596 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38597 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38598 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38599 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38609 arg "changes-track"
38617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38625 \begin_inset space ~
38628 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38630 \begin_inset space ~
38639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38648 arg "changes-output"
38656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38664 \begin_inset space ~
38667 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38669 \begin_inset space ~
38673 \begin_inset space ~
38677 \begin_inset space ~
38686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38707 Jumps to the next change
38713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38722 arg "change-accept"
38730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38736 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38738 \begin_inset space ~
38741 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38743 \begin_inset space ~
38752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38761 arg "change-reject"
38769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38775 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38777 \begin_inset space ~
38780 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38782 \begin_inset space ~
38791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38800 arg "changes-merge"
38808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38814 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38816 \begin_inset space ~
38819 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38839 arg "all-changes-accept"
38847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38855 \begin_inset space ~
38858 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38860 \begin_inset space ~
38864 \begin_inset space ~
38873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38882 arg "all-changes-reject"
38890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38898 \begin_inset space ~
38901 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38903 \begin_inset space ~
38907 \begin_inset space ~
38916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38940 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38942 \begin_inset space ~
38951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38974 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38976 \begin_inset space ~
38992 \begin_layout Standard
38993 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38999 \begin_layout Standard
39000 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39020 \begin_layout Standard
39021 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39022 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39023 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39024 the next change after the current cursor position.
39025 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39026 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39027 step to the next change.
39028 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39031 \begin_layout Standard
39032 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39033 to describe a change.
39036 \begin_layout Standard
39038 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39039 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39045 \begin_inset Index idx
39048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39056 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39058 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39065 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39071 \begin_layout Section
39072 Comparison of Documents
39073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39075 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39080 \begin_inset Index idx
39083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 Comparison of documents
39092 \begin_layout Standard
39093 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39096 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39100 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39101 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39103 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39105 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39109 \begin_inset space ~
39113 \begin_inset space ~
39117 \begin_inset space ~
39126 \begin_inset space ~
39130 \begin_inset space ~
39134 \begin_inset space ~
39138 \begin_inset space ~
39142 \begin_inset space ~
39146 \begin_inset space ~
39151 enables the change tracking option
39154 \begin_inset space ~
39158 \begin_inset space ~
39162 \begin_inset space ~
39167 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39170 \begin_layout Section
39171 International Support
39172 \begin_inset Index idx
39175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39176 International support
39184 \begin_layout Standard
39185 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39186 with any language you want.
39187 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39188 up \SpecialChar LyX
39190 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39192 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39200 \begin_layout Standard
39201 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39202 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39203 \begin_inset space ~
39207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39209 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39216 \begin_layout Subsection
39218 \begin_inset Index idx
39221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39228 \begin_inset Index idx
39231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39232 Document ! Settings
39238 \begin_inset Index idx
39241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39242 Document ! Language
39250 \begin_layout Standard
39253 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39254 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39257 dialog lets you set
39259 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39264 \begin_layout Standard
39269 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39274 \begin_inset space ~
39279 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39280 For details about the different encoding options see section
39281 \begin_inset space ~
39285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39287 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39294 \begin_layout Subsection
39295 Keyboard mapping configuration
39296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39298 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39305 \begin_layout Standard
39306 If you have for example a U.
39307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39310 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39311 can use an alternate keymap.
39312 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39317 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39318 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39319 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39322 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39323 \begin_inset space ~
39327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39329 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39334 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39335 which one you want to use.
39338 \begin_layout Standard
39339 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39340 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39341 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39345 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39346 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39347 one to support the characters you want.
39348 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39355 \begin_layout Chapter
39358 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39360 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39367 \begin_layout Standard
39368 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39369 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39370 topic inside the user's guide.
39373 \begin_layout Section
39375 \begin_inset Index idx
39378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 \begin_layout Standard
39392 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39395 \begin_layout Subsection
39399 \begin_layout Standard
39400 Creates a new document.
39403 \begin_layout Subsection
39407 \begin_layout Standard
39408 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39409 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39410 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39412 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39413 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39419 \begin_layout Subsection
39423 \begin_layout Standard
39427 \begin_layout Subsection
39431 \begin_layout Standard
39432 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39433 Click there on a file to open it.
39436 \begin_layout Subsection
39438 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39442 \begin_layout Standard
39444 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39445 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39449 \begin_layout Subsection
39453 \begin_layout Standard
39454 Closes the current document.
39457 \begin_layout Subsection
39461 \begin_layout Standard
39462 Closes all opened documents.
39465 \begin_layout Subsection
39469 \begin_layout Standard
39470 Saves the actual document.
39473 \begin_layout Subsection
39477 \begin_layout Standard
39478 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39479 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39483 \begin_layout Subsection
39485 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39489 \begin_layout Standard
39491 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39492 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39498 \begin_layout Subsection
39502 \begin_layout Standard
39503 Saves all opened documents.
39506 \begin_layout Subsection
39510 \begin_layout Standard
39511 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39514 \begin_layout Subsection
39518 \begin_layout Standard
39519 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39520 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39521 It is described in the section
39523 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39528 Additional Features
39533 \begin_layout Subsection
39537 \begin_layout Standard
39538 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39539 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39541 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39542 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39546 \begin_layout Standard
39547 When using the menu entry
39550 \begin_inset space ~
39555 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39559 \begin_inset space ~
39563 \begin_inset space ~
39567 \begin_inset space ~
39572 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39573 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39576 \begin_layout Subsection
39578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39580 name "subsec:Export"
39587 \begin_layout Standard
39588 You can export your document to various file formats.
39589 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39591 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39592 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39593 during its configuration.
39596 \begin_layout Standard
39597 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39599 \begin_inset space ~
39603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39605 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39612 \begin_layout Description
39618 \begin_inset space ~
39621 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39623 \begin_inset space ~
39626 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39627 \begin_inset Newline newline
39630 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39631 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39635 \begin_layout Description
39636 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39642 \begin_layout Description
39644 \begin_inset space ~
39647 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39653 \begin_layout Description
39654 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39655 's native DVI-format.
39656 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39657 files paths or file names in your document.
39659 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39666 \begin_layout Description
39667 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39668 in files paths or file names
39671 \begin_layout Description
39673 \begin_inset space ~
39680 ) DVI-format using the program
39682 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39685 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39689 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39697 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39705 \begin_layout Description
39707 \begin_inset space ~
39710 (cropped) the same as
39714 but with cropped page margins.
39717 \begin_layout Description
39719 \begin_inset space ~
39722 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39726 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39731 \begin_layout Description
39735 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39743 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39751 \begin_layout Description
39753 \begin_inset space ~
39757 \begin_inset space ~
39760 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39764 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39772 \begin_layout Description
39776 \begin_inset space ~
39785 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39786 source that is compilable with the program
39788 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39792 \begin_layout Description
39796 \begin_inset space ~
39801 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39802 source, additionally all images used in the document
39803 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39807 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39810 \begin_layout Description
39814 \begin_inset space ~
39819 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39820 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39821 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39829 \begin_layout Description
39833 \begin_inset space ~
39842 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39843 source that is compilable with the program
39849 \begin_layout Description
39851 \begin_inset space ~
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39862 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39863 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39869 \begin_layout Description
39871 \begin_inset space ~
39874 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39875 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39881 \begin_inset space \space{}
39886 \begin_inset space ~
39890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39905 represent the version number)
39908 \begin_layout Description
39910 \begin_inset space ~
39914 \begin_inset space ~
39917 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39918 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39919 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39923 \begin_layout Description
39924 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39925 's internal XHTML engine
39928 \begin_layout Description
39930 \begin_inset space ~
39934 \begin_inset space ~
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39942 \begin_inset space ~
39945 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39950 For the conversion the program
39959 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39962 \begin_layout Description
39963 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39968 \begin_layout Description
39970 \begin_inset space ~
39973 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39975 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39978 For the conversion the program
39987 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39990 \begin_layout Description
39992 \begin_inset space ~
39995 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39996 For the conversion the program
40005 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40008 \begin_layout Description
40010 \begin_inset space ~
40013 (cropped) the same as
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40021 but with cropped page margins
40024 \begin_layout Description
40028 \begin_inset space ~
40033 PDF-format using the program
40037 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40040 \begin_layout Description
40044 \begin_inset space ~
40048 \begin_inset space ~
40056 \begin_inset space ~
40061 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40066 \begin_inset space \space{}
40069 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40073 \begin_layout Description
40077 \begin_inset space ~
40082 PDF-format using the program
40084 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40087 , produces PDF-files directly
40090 \begin_layout Description
40094 \begin_inset space ~
40099 PDF-format using the program
40103 , produces PDF-files directly
40106 \begin_layout Description
40110 \begin_inset space ~
40115 PDF-format using the program
40119 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40122 \begin_layout Description
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40131 PDF-format using the program
40136 , produces PDF-files directly
40139 \begin_layout Description
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40151 \begin_layout Description
40155 \begin_inset space ~
40159 \begin_inset space ~
40164 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40165 and then exported as text using the program
40170 \begin_layout Description
40175 PostScript format using the program
40183 options see section
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40190 reference "subsec:General-output"
40197 \begin_layout Description
40198 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40199 source and also code in the statistical programming
40213 it is possible to use
40217 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40221 \begin_layout Standard
40222 If one of the menu entries
40229 \begin_inset space ~
40238 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40240 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40242 \begin_inset space ~
40246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40248 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40253 \begin_inset Index idx
40256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40257 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40266 \begin_layout Subsection
40270 \begin_layout Standard
40271 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40272 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40275 \begin_inset space ~
40279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40281 reference "sec:Paths"
40286 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40295 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40296 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40297 's preferences as described in section
40298 \begin_inset space ~
40302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40304 reference "subsec:Converters"
40311 \begin_layout Subsection
40312 New and Close Window
40315 \begin_layout Standard
40316 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40320 \begin_layout Subsection
40324 \begin_layout Standard
40325 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40328 \begin_layout Section
40330 \begin_inset Index idx
40333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40342 \begin_layout Subsection
40346 \begin_layout Standard
40347 Described in section
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40354 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40361 \begin_layout Subsection
40362 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40365 \begin_layout Standard
40366 Described in section
40367 \begin_inset space ~
40371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40373 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40380 \begin_layout Subsection
40384 \begin_layout Standard
40385 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40386 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40389 \begin_layout Subsection
40393 \begin_layout Standard
40394 Selects the whole document.
40397 \begin_layout Subsection
40398 Find & Replace (Quick)
40401 \begin_layout Standard
40402 Described in section
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40409 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40416 \begin_layout Subsection
40417 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40420 \begin_layout Standard
40421 Described in section
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40428 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40435 \begin_layout Subsection
40436 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40439 \begin_layout Standard
40440 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40444 \begin_layout Subsection
40446 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40450 \begin_layout Standard
40452 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40453 Described in section
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40460 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40469 \begin_layout Subsection
40471 \begin_inset Index idx
40474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40475 Paragraph ! Settings
40483 \begin_layout Standard
40484 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40485 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40489 \begin_layout Standard
40490 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40491 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40497 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40498 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40500 \begin_inset space ~
40506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40510 \begin_layout Subsection
40512 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40516 \begin_layout Standard
40518 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40519 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40524 \begin_layout Enumerate
40526 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40527 Customize text properties by means of the
40533 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40536 ; this is described in section
40537 \begin_inset space ~
40541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40543 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40550 \begin_layout Enumerate
40552 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40553 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40555 Apply last settings
40558 \begin_layout Enumerate
40560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40561 Change the casing of selected text (
40576 \begin_layout Subsection
40578 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40582 \begin_layout Standard
40584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40585 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40586 text styles (in the case of this document:
40608 \begin_inset space ~
40612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40614 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40623 \begin_layout Subsection
40624 Table and Rows & Columns
40627 \begin_layout Standard
40628 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40629 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40630 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40633 \begin_layout Subsection
40637 \begin_layout Standard
40638 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40639 It will dissolve this inset.
40640 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40644 \begin_layout Subsection
40648 \begin_layout Standard
40649 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40650 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40653 \begin_layout Subsection
40654 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40657 \begin_layout Standard
40658 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40660 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40661 \begin_inset space ~
40665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40667 reference "sec:Nesting"
40672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40674 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40681 \begin_layout Section
40683 \begin_inset Index idx
40686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40695 \begin_layout Standard
40696 At the bottom of the
40700 menu the opened documents are listed.
40703 \begin_layout Subsection
40704 Open/Close all Insets
40707 \begin_layout Standard
40708 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40711 \begin_layout Subsection
40712 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40715 \begin_layout Standard
40716 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40719 \begin_layout Standard
40720 Math macros are described in the
40727 \begin_layout Subsection
40731 \begin_layout Standard
40732 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40739 reference "sec:Navigating"
40744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40746 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40753 \begin_layout Subsection
40757 \begin_layout Standard
40758 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40766 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40773 \begin_layout Subsection
40777 \begin_layout Standard
40778 Opens a window showing console messages.
40779 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40784 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40785 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40786 is processing the document.
40789 \begin_layout Subsection
40791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40793 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40798 \begin_inset Index idx
40801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40810 \begin_layout Standard
40811 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40813 All toolbars and the
40816 \begin_inset space ~
40821 can be turned on and off.
40826 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40850 \begin_inset space ~
40855 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40859 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40866 \begin_layout Standard
40871 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40875 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40876 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40877 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40878 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40879 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40882 \begin_layout Standard
40884 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40891 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40898 \begin_layout Subsection
40902 \begin_layout Standard
40906 \begin_inset space ~
40910 \begin_inset space ~
40914 \begin_inset space ~
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40931 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40932 's main window vertically while
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40939 \begin_inset space ~
40943 \begin_inset space ~
40947 \begin_inset space ~
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40955 \begin_inset space ~
40960 will split it horizontally.
40961 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40962 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40963 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40964 three or more documents at the same time.
40965 To close a split view, use the menu
40968 \begin_inset space ~
40972 \begin_inset space ~
40980 \begin_layout Subsection
40984 \begin_layout Standard
40985 Closes a split view.
40988 \begin_layout Subsection
40992 \begin_layout Standard
40993 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40994 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40995 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40996 's main window fullscreen.
40997 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40998 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41001 \begin_layout Section
41003 \begin_inset Index idx
41006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41015 \begin_layout Subsection
41019 \begin_layout Standard
41020 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41027 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41038 \begin_layout Subsection
41040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41042 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41049 \begin_layout Standard
41050 Here you can insert the following characters:
41053 \begin_layout Description
41058 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41061 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41062 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41063 -packages you have installed.
41064 You can get a complete display by checking
41067 \begin_inset space ~
41073 \begin_inset Newline newline
41077 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41085 Not all characters will be visible in the
41089 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41090 dialog (see section
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41097 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41101 ) can display every character.
41109 \begin_layout Description
41110 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41114 \begin_layout Description
41116 \begin_inset space ~
41120 \begin_inset space ~
41123 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41130 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41137 \begin_layout Description
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41142 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41146 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41152 \begin_layout Description
41154 \begin_inset space ~
41157 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41160 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41161 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41167 \begin_layout Description
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41172 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41176 \begin_layout Description
41178 \begin_inset space ~
41181 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41185 \begin_layout Description
41187 \begin_inset space ~
41191 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41192 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41198 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41203 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41209 \begin_inset space \space{}
41212 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41213 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41222 To insert a fraction use the command
41227 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41231 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41240 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41247 \begin_layout Description
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41252 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41256 \begin_layout Description
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41262 \begin_inset Index idx
41265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41272 \begin_inset Index idx
41275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41276 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41281 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41282 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41284 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41290 \begin_inset Index idx
41293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41301 \begin_inset Newline newline
41304 More information about this feature can be found in the
41310 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41316 \begin_layout Description
41317 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41319 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41320 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41324 \begin_layout Subsection
41328 \begin_layout Standard
41329 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41332 \begin_layout Description
41333 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41334 \begin_inset script superscript
41336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41345 \begin_layout Description
41346 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41347 \begin_inset script subscript
41349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41358 \begin_layout Description
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41363 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41364 \begin_inset space ~
41368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41370 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41377 \begin_layout Description
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41382 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41389 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41396 \begin_layout Description
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41401 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41408 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41415 \begin_layout Description
41417 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41422 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41428 \begin_inset space \space{}
41431 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41432 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41441 To insert a fraction use the command
41446 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41450 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41459 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41468 \begin_layout Description
41470 \begin_inset space ~
41473 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41474 \begin_inset space ~
41478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41480 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41487 \begin_layout Description
41489 \begin_inset space ~
41492 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41499 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41506 \begin_layout Description
41508 \begin_inset space ~
41511 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41512 \begin_inset space ~
41516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41518 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41525 \begin_layout Description
41526 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41527 \begin_inset space ~
41531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41533 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41540 \begin_layout Description
41542 \begin_inset space ~
41545 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41546 \begin_inset space ~
41550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41552 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41559 \begin_layout Description
41561 \begin_inset space ~
41564 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41571 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41578 \begin_layout Description
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41584 \begin_inset space ~
41587 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41590 \begin_inset space ~
41594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41596 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41603 for a usage example.
41606 \begin_layout Description
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41612 \begin_inset space ~
41615 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41616 \begin_inset space ~
41620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41622 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41629 \begin_layout Description
41631 \begin_inset space ~
41634 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41635 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41638 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41639 \begin_inset space ~
41643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41645 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41652 \begin_layout Description
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41657 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41658 \begin_inset space ~
41662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41664 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41671 \begin_layout Description
41673 \begin_inset space ~
41676 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41677 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41679 \begin_inset space ~
41683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41685 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41692 \begin_layout Description
41694 \begin_inset space ~
41697 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41698 \begin_inset space ~
41702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41704 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41711 \begin_layout Description
41713 \begin_inset space ~
41717 \begin_inset space ~
41720 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41727 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41734 \begin_layout Subsection
41736 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41740 \begin_layout Standard
41742 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41743 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41744 The submenu allows you to insert
41747 \begin_layout Description
41749 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41751 \begin_inset space ~
41754 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41757 \begin_layout Description
41759 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41761 \begin_inset space ~
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41768 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41772 \begin_layout Description
41774 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41776 \begin_inset space ~
41779 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41782 \begin_layout Description
41784 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41786 \begin_inset space ~
41789 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41792 \begin_layout Description
41794 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41796 \begin_inset space ~
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41803 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41807 \begin_layout Description
41809 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41814 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41817 \begin_layout Description
41819 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41821 \begin_inset space ~
41825 \begin_inset space ~
41829 \begin_inset space ~
41832 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41835 \begin_layout Description
41837 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41839 \begin_inset space ~
41842 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41844 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41845 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41851 \begin_layout Description
41853 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41858 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41860 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41861 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41867 \begin_layout Description
41869 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41870 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41871 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41872 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41875 \begin_layout Subsection
41878 List/Contents/References
41881 \begin_layout Standard
41882 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41886 \begin_inset space ~
41907 are described in section
41908 \begin_inset space ~
41912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41914 reference "sec:toc"
41923 is described in section
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41930 reference "sec:Index"
41938 is described in section
41939 \begin_inset space ~
41943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41945 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41951 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41954 is described in section
41955 \begin_inset space ~
41959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41961 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41968 \begin_layout Subsection
41972 \begin_layout Standard
41973 To insert floats, as described in section
41974 \begin_inset space ~
41978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41980 reference "sec:Floats"
41984 and in detail the chapter
41991 \begin_inset space ~
41999 \begin_layout Subsection
42003 \begin_layout Standard
42004 To insert notes, described in section
42005 \begin_inset space ~
42009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42011 reference "sec:Notes"
42018 \begin_layout Subsection
42022 \begin_layout Standard
42023 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42025 Branches are described in section
42026 \begin_inset space ~
42030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42032 reference "sec:Branches"
42039 \begin_layout Subsection
42043 \begin_layout Standard
42044 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42045 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42047 An example is the document class
42048 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42058 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42067 with three custom insets.
42070 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42074 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42080 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42083 \begin_layout Subsection
42085 \begin_inset Index idx
42088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42097 \begin_layout Standard
42098 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42100 For more information see chapter
42102 External Document Parts
42105 \begin_inset space ~
42111 \begin_layout Subsection
42113 \begin_inset Index idx
42116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42125 \begin_layout Standard
42126 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42127 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42134 \begin_inset space ~
42142 \begin_layout Subsection
42146 \begin_layout Standard
42151 dialog as described in section
42152 \begin_inset space ~
42156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42158 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42165 \begin_layout Subsection
42169 \begin_layout Standard
42174 as described in section
42175 \begin_inset space ~
42179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42181 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42188 \begin_layout Subsection
42192 \begin_layout Standard
42197 as described in section
42198 \begin_inset space ~
42202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42204 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42211 \begin_layout Subsection
42213 \begin_inset Index idx
42216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42223 \begin_inset Index idx
42226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42227 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42235 \begin_layout Standard
42236 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42237 Floats are described in section
42238 \begin_inset space ~
42242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42244 reference "sec:Floats"
42248 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42251 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42259 \begin_inset space ~
42267 \begin_layout Subsection
42271 \begin_layout Standard
42272 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42273 \begin_inset space ~
42277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42279 reference "sec:Index"
42286 \begin_layout Subsection
42290 \begin_layout Standard
42291 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42292 \begin_inset space ~
42296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42298 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42305 \begin_layout Subsection
42309 \begin_layout Standard
42310 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42311 Tables are described in section
42312 \begin_inset space ~
42316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42318 reference "sec:Tables"
42322 and in detail in the chapter
42329 \begin_inset space ~
42337 \begin_layout Subsection
42341 \begin_layout Standard
42347 Graphics are described in section
42348 \begin_inset space ~
42352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42354 reference "sec:Graphics"
42361 \begin_layout Subsection
42365 \begin_layout Standard
42366 Inserts a URL as described in section
42367 \begin_inset space ~
42371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42373 reference "subsec:URLs"
42380 \begin_layout Subsection
42384 \begin_layout Standard
42385 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42386 \begin_inset space ~
42390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42392 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42399 \begin_layout Subsection
42403 \begin_layout Standard
42404 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42405 \begin_inset space ~
42409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42411 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42418 \begin_layout Subsection
42422 \begin_layout Standard
42423 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42424 \begin_inset space ~
42428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42430 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42437 \begin_layout Subsection
42440 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42443 \begin_layout Standard
42444 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42445 environments of the same type.
42447 \begin_inset space ~
42451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42453 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42457 for an explanation.
42460 \begin_layout Subsection
42464 \begin_layout Standard
42465 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42466 title or caption of a float.
42467 Inserts a short title as described in section
42468 \begin_inset space ~
42472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42474 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42481 \begin_layout Subsection
42486 \begin_layout Standard
42487 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42488 Code box as described in section
42489 \begin_inset space ~
42493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42495 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42502 \begin_layout Subsection
42504 \begin_inset Index idx
42507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42516 \begin_layout Standard
42517 Inserts a program listings box.
42518 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42520 Program Code Listings
42525 \begin_inset space ~
42533 \begin_layout Subsection
42535 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42539 \begin_layout Standard
42541 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42542 Inserts the actual date.
42543 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42550 \begin_layout Subsection
42554 \begin_layout Standard
42555 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42556 \begin_inset space ~
42560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42562 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42569 \begin_layout Section
42571 \begin_inset Index idx
42574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42583 \begin_layout Standard
42584 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42585 \begin_inset space ~
42588 of the current document.
42589 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42592 \begin_layout Subsection
42596 \begin_layout Standard
42597 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42598 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42599 to jump, for example, between section
42600 \begin_inset space ~
42604 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42608 2.5 and use the submenu
42611 \begin_inset space ~
42615 \begin_inset space ~
42622 \begin_inset space ~
42628 \begin_inset space ~
42632 \begin_inset space ~
42638 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42642 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42648 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42651 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42654 \begin_layout Standard
42655 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42659 \begin_inset space ~
42664 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42667 \begin_inset space ~
42672 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42675 \begin_layout Subsection
42676 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42679 \begin_layout Standard
42680 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42684 \begin_layout Subsection
42688 \begin_layout Standard
42689 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42690 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42691 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42695 \begin_inset space ~
42699 \begin_inset space ~
42707 \begin_layout Subsection
42711 \begin_layout Standard
42712 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42715 The \SpecialChar LyX
42716 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42718 \begin_inset space ~
42726 \begin_inset space ~
42731 manual for a detailed description.
42734 \begin_layout Section
42736 \begin_inset Index idx
42739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42748 \begin_layout Subsection
42752 \begin_layout Standard
42753 Change Tracking is described in section
42754 \begin_inset space ~
42758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42760 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42767 \begin_layout Subsection
42775 \begin_layout Standard
42776 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42777 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42778 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42780 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42781 to the clipboard or update the view.
42782 \begin_inset Newline newline
42785 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42789 \begin_layout Standard
42792 Open Containing Directory
42794 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42795 's temporary folder for the document.
42796 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42797 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42798 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42799 For example some journals require to send the
42803 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42807 \begin_layout Subsection
42808 Start Appendix Here
42811 \begin_layout Standard
42812 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42813 as described in section
42814 \begin_inset space ~
42818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42820 reference "sec:Appendices"
42827 \begin_layout Subsection
42829 \begin_inset space ~
42835 \begin_layout Standard
42836 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42837 default output format for the document (menu
42839 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42840 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42841 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42843 \begin_inset space ~
42847 \begin_inset space ~
42853 \begin_inset space ~
42857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42859 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42863 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42866 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42867 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42869 \begin_inset space ~
42872 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42874 \begin_inset space ~
42877 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42879 \begin_inset space ~
42883 \begin_inset space ~
42889 \begin_inset space ~
42893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42895 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42899 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42900 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42902 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42903 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42905 \begin_inset space ~
42908 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42910 \begin_inset space ~
42913 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42917 \begin_inset space ~
42921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42923 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42928 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42929 when it is first configured.
42930 The default output format is
42933 \begin_inset space ~
42941 \begin_layout Subsection
42942 View (Other Formats)
42945 \begin_layout Standard
42946 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42947 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42948 actual document with an external program.
42949 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42950 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42951 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42953 All possible formats are listed in section
42954 \begin_inset space ~
42958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42960 reference "subsec:Export"
42965 You should at least see the menu entry
42970 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42972 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42974 \begin_inset space ~
42978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42980 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42985 \begin_inset Index idx
42988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42989 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42998 \begin_layout Standard
42999 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43000 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43002 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43003 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43005 \begin_inset space ~
43008 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43010 \begin_inset space ~
43013 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43017 \begin_inset space ~
43021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43023 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43028 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43029 when it is first configured.
43032 \begin_layout Subsection
43034 \begin_inset space ~
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43041 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43042 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43045 \begin_layout Subsection
43046 Update (Other Formats)
43049 \begin_layout Standard
43050 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43051 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43054 \begin_layout Subsection
43055 View Master Document
43058 \begin_layout Standard
43059 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43075 \begin_inset space ~
43080 manual for more information on this topic).
43081 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43082 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43086 \begin_inset space ~
43090 \begin_inset space ~
43095 generates the output of the whole book, while
43099 will just output the chapter alone.
43102 \begin_layout Standard
43103 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43104 in the document settings (menu
43106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43107 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43108 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43110 \begin_inset space ~
43114 \begin_inset space ~
43120 \begin_inset space ~
43124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43126 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43130 ) or in the preferences (menu
43132 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43133 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43138 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43140 \begin_inset space ~
43143 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43145 \begin_inset space ~
43149 \begin_inset space ~
43155 \begin_inset space ~
43159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43161 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43168 \begin_layout Subsection
43169 Update Master Document
43172 \begin_layout Standard
43173 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43189 \begin_inset space ~
43194 manual for more information on this topic).
43195 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43196 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43199 \begin_layout Standard
43200 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43201 in the document settings (menu
43203 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43204 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43205 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43207 \begin_inset space ~
43211 \begin_inset space ~
43217 \begin_inset space ~
43221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43223 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43227 ) or in the preferences (menu
43229 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43230 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43232 \begin_inset space ~
43235 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43237 \begin_inset space ~
43240 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43242 \begin_inset space ~
43246 \begin_inset space ~
43252 \begin_inset space ~
43256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43258 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43265 \begin_layout Subsection
43267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43269 name "subsec:Compressed"
43276 \begin_layout Standard
43277 Un/compresses the current document.
43278 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43279 compression (see the
43281 Additional Features
43283 manual for details).
43286 \begin_layout Subsection
43290 \begin_layout Standard
43291 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43294 \begin_layout Subsection
43298 \begin_layout Standard
43299 The document settings are described in appendix
43300 \begin_inset space ~
43304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43306 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43313 \begin_layout Section
43315 \begin_inset Index idx
43318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43327 \begin_layout Subsection
43331 \begin_layout Standard
43332 Spell checking is explained in section
43333 \begin_inset space ~
43337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43339 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43346 \begin_layout Subsection
43350 \begin_layout Standard
43351 The thesaurus is described in section
43352 \begin_inset space ~
43356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43358 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43365 \begin_layout Subsection
43367 \begin_inset Index idx
43370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43377 \begin_inset Index idx
43380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43389 \begin_layout Standard
43390 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43391 the highlighted document part.
43394 \begin_layout Subsection
43400 \begin_inset Index idx
43403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43404 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43413 \begin_layout Standard
43414 Generates with the help of the program
43416 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43419 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43420 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43421 This feature is not available on Windows.
43424 \begin_layout Subsection
43430 \begin_inset Index idx
43433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43443 \begin_layout Standard
43444 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43449 \begin_inset space ~
43454 to see the full filename paths.
43457 \begin_layout Subsection
43459 \begin_inset Index idx
43462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43471 \begin_layout Standard
43472 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43473 files as described in section
43474 \begin_inset space ~
43478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43480 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43487 \begin_layout Subsection
43489 \begin_inset Index idx
43492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43505 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43523 \begin_inset Index idx
43526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43527 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43536 \begin_layout Standard
43537 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43538 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43539 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43540 -packages and programs it needs; see
43542 \begin_inset space ~
43546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43548 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43555 \begin_layout Subsection
43559 \begin_layout Standard
43564 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43565 \begin_inset space ~
43569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43571 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43578 \begin_layout Section
43580 \begin_inset Index idx
43583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 \begin_layout Standard
43593 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43594 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43596 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43600 \begin_layout Standard
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43609 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43610 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43611 packages and classes found
43612 by \SpecialChar LyX
43614 \begin_inset space ~
43618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43620 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43627 \begin_layout Standard
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43636 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43641 \begin_layout Section
43643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43645 name "sec:Toolbars"
43652 \begin_layout Standard
43653 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43654 \begin_inset space ~
43658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43660 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43667 \begin_layout Standard
43668 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43669 This is described in the
43671 Additional Features
43676 \begin_layout Subsection
43678 \begin_inset Index idx
43681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43690 \begin_layout Standard
43691 \begin_inset Graphics
43692 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43700 \begin_layout Standard
43701 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43707 \begin_layout Standard
43708 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43725 \begin_inset Note Note
43728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43729 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43734 manual for more information.
43742 \begin_layout Standard
43743 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43749 \begin_layout Standard
43750 \begin_inset Tabular
43751 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43752 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43753 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43754 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43760 \begin_inset Graphics
43761 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43775 pull-down box for the environments
43788 \begin_layout Standard
43789 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43795 \begin_layout Standard
43797 \begin_inset Tabular
43798 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43799 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43800 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43801 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43802 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43825 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43832 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43855 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43862 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43885 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43901 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43915 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43931 arg "spelling-continuously"
43939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43943 Spellcheck continuously
43949 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43972 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43979 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44002 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44032 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44062 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44069 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44092 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44094 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44099 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44108 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44117 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44131 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44150 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44157 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44171 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44199 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44213 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44214 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44242 Emphasize text, function of the
44243 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44246 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44251 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44259 arg "dialog-show character"
44270 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44291 Set text to noun style, function of the
44292 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44295 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44297 \begin_inset space ~
44300 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44302 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44308 arg "dialog-show character"
44319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44325 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44328 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44341 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44344 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44357 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44362 arg "textstyle-apply"
44372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44377 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44378 Format text using the current settings in the
44380 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44382 \begin_inset space ~
44385 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44396 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44420 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44422 \begin_inset space ~
44431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44440 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44468 arg "tabular-insert"
44476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44495 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44498 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44511 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44514 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44530 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44542 Toggle outline window on/off,
44544 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44551 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44560 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44572 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44578 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44587 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44599 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44612 \begin_layout Subsection
44614 \begin_inset Index idx
44617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44626 \begin_layout Standard
44627 \begin_inset Graphics
44628 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44636 \begin_layout Standard
44637 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44643 \begin_layout Standard
44644 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44648 \begin_layout Standard
44649 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44655 \begin_layout Standard
44656 \begin_inset Tabular
44657 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44658 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44659 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44660 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44661 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44697 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44724 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44751 arg "layout-toggle List"
44759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44778 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44796 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44805 arg "depth-increment"
44813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44819 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44821 \begin_inset space ~
44825 \begin_inset space ~
44834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44843 arg "depth-decrement"
44851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44857 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44859 \begin_inset space ~
44863 \begin_inset space ~
44872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44881 arg "float-insert figure"
44889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44895 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44896 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44912 arg "float-insert table"
44920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44927 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44973 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44987 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44994 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45003 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45024 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45047 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45058 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45067 arg "nomencl-insert"
45075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45081 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45083 \begin_inset space ~
45092 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45101 arg "footnote-insert"
45109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45131 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45147 \begin_inset space ~
45156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45180 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45182 \begin_inset space ~
45191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45200 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45276 \begin_inset space ~
45285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45294 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45308 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45309 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45325 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45339 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45340 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45342 \begin_inset space ~
45351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45360 arg "dialog-show character"
45368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45374 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45376 \begin_inset space ~
45379 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45392 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45397 arg "textstyle-apply"
45405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45410 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45411 Format text using the recent settings in the
45414 arg "dialog-show character"
45423 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45432 arg "layout-paragraph"
45440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45446 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45457 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45466 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45480 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45494 \begin_layout Subsection
45495 View/Update Toolbar
45496 \begin_inset Index idx
45499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45500 Toolbar ! View / Update
45508 \begin_layout Standard
45509 \begin_inset Graphics
45510 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45517 \begin_layout Standard
45518 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45524 \begin_layout Standard
45525 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45529 \begin_layout Standard
45530 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45536 \begin_layout Standard
45537 \begin_inset Tabular
45538 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45539 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45540 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45541 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45581 arg "buffer-update"
45589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45595 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45611 arg "master-buffer-view"
45619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45627 \begin_inset space ~
45636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45645 arg "master-buffer-update"
45653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45661 \begin_inset space ~
45665 \begin_inset space ~
45674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45698 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45699 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45700 Synchronize with Output
45706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45717 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45733 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45734 View (Other Formats)
45740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45747 arg "update-others"
45751 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45766 Update (Other Formats)
45779 \begin_layout Standard
45781 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45782 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45788 \begin_layout Subsection
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45794 \begin_inset space ~
45798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45800 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45804 , the table toolbar
45805 \begin_inset Index idx
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45817 \begin_inset space ~
45822 manual and the math macro toolbar
45823 \begin_inset Index idx
45826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45839 \begin_layout Chapter
45840 The Document Settings
45841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45843 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45848 \begin_inset Index idx
45851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45852 Document ! Settings
45860 \begin_layout Standard
45864 \begin_inset space ~
45869 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45870 is called with the menu
45872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45876 You can save your document settings as default with the
45878 Save as Document Defaults
45880 button in any dialog.
45881 This will create a template named
45885 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45886 when you create a new document without
45890 \begin_layout Standard
45895 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45896 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45899 \begin_layout Standard
45900 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45901 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45902 to find the one you are looking for.
45903 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45904 the submenus of the dialog.
45906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45910 \begin_inset space \space{}
45914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45921 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45922 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45923 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45926 \begin_layout Section
45930 \begin_layout Standard
45931 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45933 Document classes are described in section
45934 \begin_inset space ~
45938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45940 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45947 \begin_layout Standard
45951 \begin_inset space ~
45956 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45961 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45962 as a layout for a document class.
45963 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45965 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45974 \begin_layout Standard
45975 Some classes use special class options by default.
45976 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45980 and you can decide to use them or not.
45981 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45982 recommended you leave them untouched.
45987 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45988 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45993 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45995 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46001 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46002 \begin_inset Newline newline
46007 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46010 \begin_inset Newline newline
46013 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46014 distribution, see section
46019 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46021 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46034 \begin_layout Standard
46039 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46040 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46041 in the background if the child document
46042 is opened without its master.
46043 This way child documents are always compilable.
46044 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46051 \begin_inset space ~
46059 \begin_layout Standard
46060 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46071 \begin_inset Index idx
46074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46076 packages ! prettyref
46082 \begin_inset Index idx
46085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46087 packages ! refstyle
46092 for cross-references, see section
46093 \begin_inset space ~
46097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46099 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46106 \begin_layout Section
46110 \begin_layout Standard
46111 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46112 Please refer to the section
46115 \begin_inset space ~
46123 \begin_inset space ~
46128 manual for details.
46131 \begin_layout Section
46135 \begin_layout Standard
46136 Modules are explained in section
46137 \begin_inset space ~
46141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46143 reference "subsec:Modules"
46150 \begin_layout Section
46154 \begin_layout Standard
46156 \begin_inset space ~
46160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46162 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46169 \begin_layout Section
46173 \begin_layout Standard
46174 The document font settings are described in section
46175 \begin_inset space ~
46179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46181 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46188 \begin_layout Section
46192 \begin_layout Standard
46193 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46205 \begin_inset space ~
46210 and whether it should be a
46213 \begin_inset space ~
46218 can also be specified here.
46221 \begin_layout Standard
46222 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46223 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46224 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46226 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46229 \begin_layout Standard
46232 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46235 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46236 justifies the text on screen.
46237 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46239 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46243 \begin_layout Standard
46245 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46254 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46259 \begin_layout Section
46263 \begin_layout Standard
46264 This dialog is described in sections
46265 \begin_inset space ~
46269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46271 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46278 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46285 \begin_layout Section
46289 \begin_layout Standard
46290 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46291 \begin_inset space ~
46295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46297 reference "subsec:Margins"
46304 \begin_layout Section
46306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46308 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46313 \begin_inset Index idx
46316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46317 Language ! Encoding
46325 \begin_layout Standard
46326 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46327 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46328 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46330 is always encoded in utf8).
46331 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46332 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46333 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46334 -command is not known for
46335 a particular character).
46336 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46340 \begin_layout Standard
46342 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46343 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46344 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46345 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46346 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46347 's default encoding).
46348 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46349 's Unicode support covers the
46350 characters of most scripts.
46351 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46352 using one of the traditional, or
46353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46360 , encodings is necessary.
46363 \begin_layout Standard
46365 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46367 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46370 Traditional (auto-selected)
46376 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46377 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46378 the given language(s).
46380 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46384 \begin_layout Standard
46386 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46387 If you use the option
46392 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46395 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46396 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46399 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46402 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46403 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46404 exactly one encoding.
46405 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46410 \begin_layout Standard
46412 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46413 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46419 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46420 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46424 \begin_layout Standard
46426 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46427 Finally, you can also select
46431 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46432 Note that this encoding is then used for
46437 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46438 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46442 \begin_layout Standard
46444 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46447 Do not load inputenc
46449 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46450 from automatically loading the
46457 \begin_inset Index idx
46460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46462 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46464 packages ! inputenc
46472 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46473 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46474 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46475 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46476 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46478 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46484 Traditional (auto-selected)
46491 \begin_layout Standard
46493 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46495 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46496 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46497 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46498 installation supports Unicode), choose
46499 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46500 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46501 is quite incomplete, so
46502 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46507 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46508 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46509 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46510 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46511 -commands is not used, because all
46512 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46513 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46514 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46515 , two new alternative engines
46516 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46518 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46520 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46523 \begin_inset space ~
46531 \begin_inset space ~
46539 \begin_inset space ~
46545 \begin_inset space ~
46549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46551 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46556 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46560 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46565 \begin_layout Standard
46569 \begin_inset space ~
46574 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46575 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46585 The possible settings are:
46588 \begin_layout Description
46589 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46591 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46592 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46596 \begin_inset space ~
46600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46602 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46609 \begin_layout Description
46610 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46611 format you will use.
46612 In many cases this will be
46617 \begin_inset Index idx
46620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46628 If the newer package
46633 \begin_inset Index idx
46636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46638 packages ! polyglossia
46643 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46644 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46645 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46647 this package will be used instead of
46654 \begin_layout Description
46656 \begin_inset space ~
46667 would be more appropriate.
46670 \begin_layout Description
46671 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46672 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46676 (for German texts), type in
46679 \begin_inset Newline newline
46684 usepackage{ngerman}
46687 \begin_layout Description
46688 None will not use a language package.
46689 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46692 \begin_layout Standard
46693 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46696 \begin_layout Description
46698 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46700 \begin_inset space ~
46704 \begin_inset space ~
46708 \begin_inset space ~
46715 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46721 \begin_inset Index idx
46724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46726 packages ! inputenc
46732 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46733 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46734 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46740 \begin_layout Description
46741 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46743 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46744 commands, which may result in a big
46745 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46746 -commands are needed.
46748 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46749 This is the same as the
46762 \begin_layout Description
46764 \begin_inset space ~
46768 \begin_inset space ~
46771 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46774 \begin_layout Description
46776 \begin_inset space ~
46780 \begin_inset space ~
46783 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46786 \begin_layout Description
46788 \begin_inset space ~
46791 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46794 \begin_layout Description
46796 \begin_inset space ~
46800 \begin_inset space ~
46803 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46804 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46807 \begin_layout Description
46809 \begin_inset space ~
46813 \begin_inset space ~
46816 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46820 \begin_layout Description
46822 \begin_inset space ~
46826 \begin_inset space ~
46829 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46830 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46833 \begin_layout Description
46835 \begin_inset space ~
46839 \begin_inset space ~
46843 \begin_inset space ~
46846 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46847 \begin_inset space ~
46853 \begin_layout Description
46855 \begin_inset space ~
46859 \begin_inset space ~
46863 \begin_inset space ~
46866 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46867 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46870 \begin_layout Description
46872 \begin_inset space ~
46876 \begin_inset space ~
46879 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46880 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46881 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46882 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46883 \begin_inset space ~
46887 \begin_inset space ~
46893 \begin_layout Description
46895 \begin_inset space ~
46899 \begin_inset space ~
46902 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46903 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46904 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46906 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46907 \begin_inset space ~
46911 \begin_inset space ~
46917 \begin_layout Description
46919 \begin_inset space ~
46923 \begin_inset space ~
46926 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46929 \begin_layout Description
46931 \begin_inset space ~
46935 \begin_inset space ~
46938 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46941 \begin_layout Description
46943 \begin_inset space ~
46947 \begin_inset space ~
46950 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46953 \begin_layout Description
46955 \begin_inset space ~
46958 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46961 \begin_layout Description
46963 \begin_inset space ~
46966 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46969 \begin_layout Description
46971 \begin_inset space ~
46975 \begin_inset space ~
46978 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46981 \begin_layout Description
46983 \begin_inset space ~
46987 \begin_inset space ~
46993 \begin_layout Description
46995 \begin_inset space ~
46999 \begin_inset space ~
47002 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47005 \begin_layout Description
47007 \begin_inset space ~
47011 \begin_inset space ~
47017 \begin_layout Description
47019 \begin_inset space ~
47023 \begin_inset space ~
47026 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47032 \begin_inset Index idx
47035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47042 , when using this, set the document language to
47047 \begin_layout Description
47049 \begin_inset space ~
47053 \begin_inset space ~
47056 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47061 , when using this, set the document language to
47064 \begin_inset space ~
47070 \begin_layout Description
47072 \begin_inset space ~
47076 \begin_inset space ~
47079 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47085 \begin_inset Index idx
47088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47090 packages ! japanese
47095 , when using this, set the document language to
47100 \begin_layout Description
47102 \begin_inset space ~
47106 \begin_inset space ~
47109 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47114 , when using this, set the document language to
47119 \begin_layout Description
47121 \begin_inset space ~
47125 \begin_inset space ~
47128 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47133 , when using this, set the document language to
47138 \begin_layout Description
47140 \begin_inset space ~
47143 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47146 \begin_layout Description
47148 \begin_inset space ~
47152 \begin_inset space ~
47156 \begin_inset space ~
47159 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47162 \begin_layout Description
47164 \begin_inset space ~
47168 \begin_inset space ~
47172 \begin_inset space ~
47175 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47176 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47177 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47180 \begin_layout Description
47182 \begin_inset space ~
47186 \begin_inset space ~
47192 \begin_layout Description
47194 \begin_inset space ~
47198 \begin_inset space ~
47201 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47202 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47205 \begin_layout Description
47207 \begin_inset space ~
47211 \begin_inset space ~
47214 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47220 \begin_inset Index idx
47223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47230 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47231 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47233 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47234 with the default encoding (
47236 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47242 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47243 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47248 \begin_layout Description
47250 \begin_inset space ~
47258 \begin_inset space ~
47261 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47268 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47271 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47278 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47279 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47281 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47284 \begin_layout Description
47286 \begin_inset space ~
47290 \begin_inset space ~
47293 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47299 \begin_inset Index idx
47302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47310 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47313 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47315 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47316 This used to be more comprehensive than
47319 \begin_inset space ~
47324 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47329 \begin_layout Description
47331 \begin_inset space ~
47334 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47340 \begin_inset Index idx
47343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47345 packages ! inputenc
47352 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47353 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47355 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47356 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47357 with the default encoding (
47359 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47365 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47366 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47371 \begin_layout Description
47373 \begin_inset space ~
47377 \begin_inset space ~
47381 \begin_inset space ~
47384 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47385 \begin_inset space ~
47391 \begin_layout Description
47393 \begin_inset space ~
47397 \begin_inset space ~
47401 \begin_inset space ~
47404 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47405 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47406 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47410 \begin_layout Description
47412 \begin_inset space ~
47416 \begin_inset space ~
47420 \begin_inset space ~
47423 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47424 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47427 \begin_layout Section
47429 \begin_inset Index idx
47432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47439 \begin_inset Index idx
47442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47449 \begin_inset Index idx
47452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47453 Color ! Shaded boxes
47459 \begin_inset Index idx
47462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47463 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47471 \begin_layout Standard
47472 Here you can alter the font color for the
47476 (default: black), for
47479 \begin_inset space ~
47484 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47488 (default: white) and for
47491 \begin_inset space ~
47501 sets the color back to the default.
47504 \begin_layout Standard
47505 Clicking any button showing
47513 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47514 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47515 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47516 later more quickly.
47519 \begin_layout Standard
47520 Note, if you change the
47523 \begin_inset space ~
47528 font color and use the option
47531 \begin_inset space ~
47536 in the document settings under
47539 \begin_inset space ~
47544 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47545 \begin_inset space ~
47549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47551 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47558 \begin_layout Standard
47559 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47565 \begin_layout Standard
47569 \begin_inset space ~
47578 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47581 \begin_inset space ~
47584 Code after a forced page break:
47587 \begin_layout Itemize
47588 For the page color:
47589 \begin_inset Newline newline
47596 pagecolor{color name}
47599 \begin_layout Itemize
47600 For the text color:
47601 \begin_inset Newline newline
47611 \begin_layout Standard
47612 You are restricted to one of
47648 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47655 \begin_inset space ~
47661 \begin_inset Newline newline
47664 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47665 names to refer to them:
47668 \begin_layout Itemize
47674 \begin_inset Newline newline
47679 page_backgroundcolor
47682 \begin_layout Itemize
47686 \begin_inset space ~
47692 \begin_inset Newline newline
47700 \begin_layout Itemize
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47710 \begin_inset Newline newline
47718 \begin_layout Itemize
47722 \begin_inset space ~
47728 \begin_inset Newline newline
47736 \begin_layout Standard
47737 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47740 \begin_inset space ~
47748 \begin_inset space ~
47756 \begin_layout Section
47758 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47762 \begin_layout Standard
47764 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47765 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47766 \begin_inset space ~
47770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47772 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47780 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47781 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47784 \begin_layout Standard
47786 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47787 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47789 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47792 \begin_layout Section
47796 \begin_layout Standard
47797 Here you can adjust the
47801 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47805 as described in section
47806 \begin_inset space ~
47810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47812 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47817 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47821 \begin_layout Standard
47823 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47824 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47826 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47827 of this package can be used as well.
47828 The most common one are:
47831 \begin_layout Description
47833 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47834 right Line numbers to the right margin
47837 \begin_layout Description
47839 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47840 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47844 \begin_layout Description
47846 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47847 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47850 \begin_layout Description
47852 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47853 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47856 \begin_layout Description
47858 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47860 \begin_inset space ~
47863 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47868 \begin_layout Section
47872 \begin_layout Standard
47873 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47879 \begin_inset Index idx
47882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47884 packages ! biblatex
47894 \begin_inset Index idx
47897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47909 \begin_inset Index idx
47912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47920 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47923 Sectioned bibliography
47925 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47931 \begin_inset Index idx
47934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47936 packages ! bibtopic
47946 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47947 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47951 for the generation of the bibliography.
47952 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47953 \begin_inset space ~
47957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47959 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47966 \begin_layout Section
47970 \begin_layout Standard
47971 Here you can define the
47975 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47977 \begin_inset space ~
47981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47983 reference "sec:Index"
47990 \begin_layout Section
47994 \begin_layout Standard
47995 The PDF properties are explained in section
47996 \begin_inset space ~
48000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48002 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48009 \begin_layout Section
48013 \begin_layout Standard
48014 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48015 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48021 \begin_inset Index idx
48024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48036 \begin_inset Index idx
48039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48051 \begin_inset Index idx
48054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48066 \begin_inset Index idx
48069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48081 \begin_inset Index idx
48084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48086 packages ! mathdots
48096 \begin_inset Index idx
48099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48101 packages ! mathtools
48111 \begin_inset Index idx
48114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48126 \begin_inset Index idx
48129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48131 packages ! stackrel
48141 \begin_inset Index idx
48144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48146 packages ! stmaryrd
48156 \begin_inset Index idx
48159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48161 packages ! undertilde
48166 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48169 \begin_layout Description
48170 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48171 -errors in formulas,
48172 ensure that you have this enabled.
48175 \begin_layout Description
48176 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48177 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48178 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48182 \begin_layout Description
48183 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48186 \begin_inset space ~
48198 \begin_layout Description
48199 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48202 \begin_inset space ~
48214 \begin_layout Description
48215 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48226 \begin_layout Description
48227 mathtools is used for the math commands
48263 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48270 \begin_layout Description
48271 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48273 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48282 \begin_layout Description
48283 stackrel is used for the math command
48300 \begin_layout Description
48301 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48304 \begin_layout Description
48305 undertilde is used for the math command
48313 Accents for one Character
48322 \begin_layout Section
48324 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48326 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48332 \begin_layout Standard
48334 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48335 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48338 \begin_layout Standard
48340 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48341 The float placement options
48342 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48345 are described in the section
48348 \begin_inset space ~
48352 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48354 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48362 \begin_inset space ~
48370 \begin_layout Section
48374 \begin_layout Standard
48375 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48377 Program Code Listings
48382 \begin_inset space ~
48390 \begin_layout Section
48394 \begin_layout Standard
48395 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48403 set to be used and set the
48408 The itemize environment is described in section
48409 \begin_inset space ~
48413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48415 reference "sec:Itemize"
48422 \begin_layout Standard
48423 You can furthermore specify a
48426 \begin_inset space ~
48431 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48432 command of the desired character.
48433 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48440 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48446 \begin_inset space \space{}
48450 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48460 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48461 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48464 \begin_layout Standard
48465 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48473 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48474 -packages in the preamble (menu
48477 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48478 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48481 \begin_inset space ~
48487 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48491 usepackage{textcomp}
48494 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48498 usepackage{amssymb}
48508 \begin_layout Section
48512 \begin_layout Standard
48513 Branches are described in section
48514 \begin_inset space ~
48518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48520 reference "sec:Branches"
48527 \begin_layout Section
48529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48531 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48538 \begin_layout Standard
48539 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48542 \begin_layout Description
48544 \begin_inset space ~
48548 \begin_inset space ~
48551 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48571 View Master Document
48572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48579 Update Master Document
48580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48587 menu or the toolbar.
48588 The default is set in
48590 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48591 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48593 \begin_inset space ~
48596 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48600 \begin_inset space ~
48604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48606 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48613 \begin_layout Description
48615 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48617 \begin_inset space ~
48621 \begin_inset space ~
48625 \begin_inset space ~
48628 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48633 option which is needed with some packages.
48634 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48635 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48638 \begin_layout Description
48640 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48642 \begin_inset space ~
48646 \begin_inset space ~
48649 Options offers settings for the
48657 \begin_layout Itemize
48661 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48663 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48665 \begin_inset space ~
48671 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48673 \begin_inset space ~
48677 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48683 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48685 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48686 settings for the menu
48688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48692 \begin_inset space ~
48696 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48699 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48700 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48705 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48707 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48709 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48712 or a detailed description see section
48714 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48719 \begin_inset space ~
48725 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48729 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48733 \begin_layout Itemize
48735 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48738 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48740 determines whether so-called
48741 \begin_inset Quotes els
48745 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48749 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48751 \begin_inset Quotes els
48755 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48758 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48759 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48760 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48762 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48764 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48765 macros, you can uncheck this.
48766 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48773 \begin_layout Description
48775 \begin_inset space ~
48779 \begin_inset space ~
48782 Options offers settings for the export format
48790 \begin_inset space ~
48795 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48796 \begin_inset space ~
48799 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48803 \begin_inset space ~
48808 settings are described in detail in section
48810 Math Output in XHTML
48815 \begin_inset space ~
48824 \begin_inset space ~
48828 \begin_inset space ~
48833 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48836 \begin_layout Description
48838 \begin_inset space ~
48843 Save transient properties
48845 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48846 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48847 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48851 \begin_layout Itemize
48852 the activation of change tracking
48855 \begin_layout Itemize
48856 the output of tracked changes
48859 \begin_layout Itemize
48860 the recording of the document directory path.
48863 \begin_layout Standard
48864 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48865 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48869 \begin_layout Section
48877 \begin_layout Standard
48878 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48880 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48882 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48884 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48888 \begin_layout Standard
48889 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48890 -syntax is given in section
48891 \begin_inset space ~
48895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48897 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48904 \begin_layout Chapter
48910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48912 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48917 \begin_inset Index idx
48920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48929 \begin_layout Standard
48930 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48932 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48936 It has the following submenus.
48939 \begin_layout Section
48943 \begin_layout Subsection
48947 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48948 User Interface File
48949 \begin_inset Index idx
48952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48953 Customization ! of toolbars
48959 \begin_inset Index idx
48962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48963 Customization ! of menus
48971 \begin_layout Standard
48972 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48973 interface (ui) file.
48974 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48982 \begin_layout Description
48987 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48990 \begin_layout Description
48997 the menu entries in popup context menus
49000 \begin_layout Description
49005 specifies the toolbar buttons
49008 \begin_layout Standard
49009 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49010 and edit the entries.
49013 \begin_layout Standard
49014 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49026 entries must be finished with an explicit
49051 and in the case of the
49052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49064 The syntax for the entries is:
49067 \begin_layout Standard
49068 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49097 \begin_layout Standard
49099 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49102 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49103 -functions are listed in the menu
49105 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49107 \begin_inset space ~
49115 \begin_layout Standard
49116 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49122 \begin_layout Standard
49123 For example, assuming you use the menu
49125 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49128 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49132 \begin_layout Standard
49133 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49157 \begin_layout Standard
49159 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49174 to have the sixth bookmark.
49177 \begin_layout Standard
49181 \begin_inset space ~
49186 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49187 's toolbar buttons.
49188 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49192 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49204 \begin_layout Standard
49207 Enable tool tips in main work area
49209 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49217 \begin_layout Standard
49222 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49223 should display in the menu
49225 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49227 \begin_inset space ~
49235 \begin_layout Subsection
49239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49243 \begin_layout Standard
49246 Restore window layouts and geometries
49249 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49250 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49254 \begin_layout Standard
49257 Restore cursor positions
49259 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49263 \begin_layout Standard
49266 Load opened files from last session
49268 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49272 \begin_layout Standard
49275 Clear all session information
49277 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49278 sessions (cursor positions, names
49279 of last opened documents, etc.).
49282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49286 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49291 \begin_inset Index idx
49294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49303 \begin_layout Standard
49306 Backup original documents when saving
49308 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49309 it was saved the last time.
49310 It is stored in the
49313 \begin_inset space ~
49319 \begin_inset space ~
49323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49325 reference "sec:Paths"
49329 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49332 \begin_inset space ~
49338 The backup file has the file extension
49339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49353 \begin_layout Standard
49356 Backup documents, every
49358 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49361 \begin_layout Standard
49364 Save documents compressed by default
49366 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49367 \begin_inset space ~
49371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49373 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49378 This applies to newly created documents only.
49379 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49383 Windows & work area
49386 \begin_layout Standard
49389 Open documents in tabs
49391 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49395 \begin_layout Standard
49400 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49407 \begin_inset space ~
49411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49413 reference "sec:Paths"
49417 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49424 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49425 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49426 of \SpecialChar LyX
49428 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49429 instance is created for each file.
49432 \begin_layout Standard
49435 Single close-tab button
49437 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49447 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49448 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49449 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49453 \begin_layout Standard
49454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49462 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49463 before the change takes effect.
49471 \begin_layout Standard
49476 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49478 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49480 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49484 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49485 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49486 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49489 \begin_layout Subsection
49491 \begin_inset Index idx
49494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49503 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49510 \begin_layout Standard
49511 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49515 \begin_layout Standard
49516 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49524 This section only deals with the fonts
49528 the \SpecialChar LyX
49530 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49533 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49534 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49545 \begin_layout Standard
49546 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49563 (depends on the system) as its
49566 \begin_inset space ~
49582 \begin_layout Standard
49583 You can change the font size with the
49590 \begin_layout Standard
49595 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49600 points have the size of 1
49601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49605 \begin_inset space ~
49609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49611 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49616 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49621 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49622 \begin_inset space ~
49626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49628 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49635 \begin_layout Subsection
49637 \begin_inset Index idx
49640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49641 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49648 \begin_inset Index idx
49651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49660 \begin_layout Standard
49661 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49662 by choosing an item in the
49663 list and selecting the
49670 \begin_layout Standard
49671 By checking the option
49675 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49678 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49679 \begin_inset space ~
49683 \begin_inset space ~
49688 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49691 \begin_layout Subsection
49693 \begin_inset Index idx
49696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49705 \begin_layout Standard
49706 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49710 \begin_layout Standard
49715 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49716 This feature is described in section
49717 \begin_inset space ~
49721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49723 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49730 \begin_layout Standard
49731 Checking the option
49734 \begin_inset space ~
49738 \begin_inset space ~
49742 \begin_inset space ~
49747 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49750 \begin_layout Section
49752 \begin_inset Index idx
49755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49764 \begin_layout Subsection
49768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49772 \begin_layout Standard
49775 Cursor follows scrollbar
49777 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49781 \begin_layout Standard
49782 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49783 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49784 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49787 \begin_layout Standard
49790 Scroll below end of document
49792 is self-explanatory.
49795 \begin_layout Standard
49796 In \SpecialChar LyX
49797 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49804 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49806 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49807 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49808 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49812 \begin_layout Standard
49814 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49817 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49819 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49820 paste operations (i.
49821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49824 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49825 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49826 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49827 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49828 dissolving from insets.
49833 \begin_layout Standard
49836 Sort environments alphabetically
49838 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49841 \begin_layout Standard
49844 Group environments by their category
49846 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49849 \begin_layout Standard
49854 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49863 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
49867 \begin_layout Standard
49869 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
49872 Search drive for cited files
49874 allows \SpecialChar LyX
49875 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
49878 \begin_inset space ~
49882 \begin_inset space ~
49886 \begin_inset space ~
49890 \begin_inset space ~
49893 Content\SpecialChar ldots
49896 context menu on a citation.
49901 field determines the search pattern.
49903 \begin_inset space ~
49907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49909 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
49918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49922 \begin_layout Standard
49923 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49928 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49929 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49933 \begin_layout Subsection
49935 \begin_inset Index idx
49938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49945 \begin_inset Index idx
49948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49949 Settings ! Shortcuts
49957 \begin_layout Standard
49962 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49964 Several binding files are available, among them:
49967 \begin_layout Description
49968 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49971 \begin_layout Description
49972 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49984 \begin_layout Description
49985 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49996 \begin_layout Standard
49997 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50002 , and binding files for special languages.
50003 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50008 \begin_inset space \space{}
50012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50020 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50021 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50022 will try to use the appropriate binding
50026 \begin_layout Standard
50027 Some binding files, like
50031 , only have a limited scope.
50032 When looking at the end of the file
50036 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50039 \begin_layout Standard
50043 \begin_inset space ~
50047 \begin_inset space ~
50052 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50053 in the selected key binding file.
50056 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50060 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50065 \begin_inset Index idx
50068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50069 Key Bindings ! Editing
50077 \begin_layout Standard
50078 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50079 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50080 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50081 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50084 Show key-bindings containing
50087 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50088 Insert there for example as keyword
50089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50096 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50097 functions that contain
50098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50106 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50107 All \SpecialChar LyX
50108 functions are also listed in the file
50113 that you will find in the
50120 \begin_layout Standard
50121 For example, to add the shortcut
50129 , select the function and press the
50134 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50135 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50138 \begin_layout Standard
50139 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50140 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50142 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
50143 function names as a semicolon separated list.
50145 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50149 \begin_layout Standard
50150 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50153 \begin_layout Standard
50154 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50156 The syntax of the entries is:
50159 \begin_layout Standard
50165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50184 \begin_layout Standard
50185 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50186 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50214 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50215 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50216 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50217 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50219 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50223 , you needed to specify it as
50228 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50231 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50234 \begin_layout Subsection
50236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50238 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50243 \begin_inset Index idx
50246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50253 \begin_inset Index idx
50256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50257 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50265 \begin_layout Standard
50266 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50267 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50268 provides keyboard maps.
50269 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50270 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50273 \begin_inset space ~
50277 \begin_inset space ~
50282 and select the keyboard map file named
50289 \begin_layout Standard
50298 keyboard map and, if you use the
50302 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50305 arg "keymap-primary"
50311 arg "keymap-secondary"
50314 respectively or toggle between them with
50317 arg "keymap-toggle"
50323 \begin_layout Standard
50324 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50332 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50341 \begin_layout Standard
50342 You can also specify the mouse
50344 Wheel scrolling speed
50347 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50351 Middle mouse button pasting
50353 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50354 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50357 \begin_layout Standard
50365 \begin_inset space ~
50369 \begin_inset space ~
50374 you can select a key for zooming.
50375 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50378 \begin_layout Subsection
50382 \begin_layout Standard
50383 Input completion is described in section
50384 \begin_inset space ~
50388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50390 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50397 \begin_layout Section
50399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50406 \begin_inset Index idx
50409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50416 \begin_inset Index idx
50419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50428 \begin_layout Standard
50429 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50430 are normally determined during
50432 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50435 \begin_layout Description
50437 \begin_inset space ~
50440 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50441 's working directory.
50442 It is the default when you
50453 \begin_inset space ~
50461 \begin_layout Description
50463 \begin_inset space ~
50466 templates This directory
50467 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50468 contains the templates that are shown
50469 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50470 will be opened when you use the menu
50471 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50476 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50478 \begin_inset space ~
50482 \begin_inset space ~
50490 \begin_layout Description
50492 \begin_inset space ~
50495 files This directory
50496 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50497 will be opened when you use the
50498 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50499 contains the example files that are listed in
50502 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50511 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50513 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50515 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50521 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50523 \begin_inset Newline newline
50527 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50539 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50540 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50550 \begin_layout Description
50552 \begin_inset space ~
50556 \begin_inset Index idx
50559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50565 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50566 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50567 \begin_inset space ~
50571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50573 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50581 will be used to save the backups.
50582 \begin_inset Newline newline
50585 Backup files have the ending
50586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50596 \begin_layout Description
50598 \begin_inset space ~
50601 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50602 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50604 \begin_inset Newline newline
50611 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50617 You can edit this file with the program
50626 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50627 in its preferences under
50630 \begin_inset space ~
50636 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50641 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50643 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50644 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50650 and \SpecialChar LyX
50651 need to be running the same time.
50652 \begin_inset Newline newline
50655 The pipe is also used for the
50659 feature, see section
50660 \begin_inset space ~
50664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50666 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50671 \begin_inset Newline newline
50674 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50675 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50676 \begin_inset Newline newline
50692 \begin_layout Description
50694 \begin_inset space ~
50697 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50700 \begin_layout Description
50702 \begin_inset space ~
50705 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50706 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50707 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50710 \begin_layout Description
50712 \begin_inset space ~
50715 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50721 You only need to specify it if you are using
50725 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50727 For \SpecialChar LyX
50732 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50736 \begin_layout Description
50738 \begin_inset space ~
50741 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50742 When \SpecialChar LyX
50743 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50744 to find it on the system.
50745 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50747 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50756 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50757 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50760 \begin_layout Description
50762 \begin_inset space ~
50765 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50766 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50767 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50768 code or in the document
50770 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50772 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50773 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50774 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50775 scanned for the input files.
50776 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50777 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50779 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50780 compilation may fail for some documents.
50783 \begin_layout Section
50787 \begin_layout Standard
50788 Here you can insert your
50797 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50799 \begin_inset space ~
50803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50805 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50809 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50812 \begin_layout Section
50814 \begin_inset Index idx
50817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50818 Language ! Settings
50824 \begin_inset Index idx
50827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50828 Settings ! Language
50836 \begin_layout Subsection
50838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50840 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50847 \begin_layout Description
50849 \begin_inset space ~
50853 \begin_inset space ~
50856 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50858 You can find its actual translation status here:
50859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50861 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50867 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50871 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50873 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50874 LaTeX Language Support
50879 \begin_layout Description
50881 \begin_inset space ~
50884 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50885 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50886 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50887 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50904 The most widespread language package is
50909 \begin_inset Index idx
50912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50919 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50921 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50922 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50923 come with the alternative
50929 \begin_inset Index idx
50932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50934 packages ! polyglossia
50939 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50940 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50946 The available selections are described in section
50947 \begin_inset space ~
50951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50953 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50960 \begin_layout Description
50962 \begin_inset space ~
50966 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50967 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50968 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50970 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50974 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50978 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50980 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50984 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50985 that is used to switch to a different language
50986 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50987 to start the package
50991 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50992 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50996 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50997 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51000 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51004 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51012 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51020 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51023 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51025 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51029 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51047 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51048 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51055 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51056 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51061 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51066 , this setting is ignored.
51071 \begin_layout Description
51073 \begin_inset space ~
51077 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51084 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51085 Use this if the language switch set in
51089 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51093 's alternative command
51097 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51098 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51101 end{otherlanguage*}
51105 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51106 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51107 command toggles the package on and off
51108 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51109 Empty by default, as
51113 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51115 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51120 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51126 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51131 , this setting is ignored.
51136 \begin_layout Description
51138 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51140 \begin_inset space ~
51144 \begin_inset space ~
51147 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51151 \begin_layout Description
51153 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51155 \begin_inset space ~
51159 \begin_inset space ~
51162 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51168 \begin_layout Description
51170 \begin_inset space ~
51174 \begin_inset space ~
51178 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51180 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51183 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51184 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51187 to the document class options
51188 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51189 rather than the language package options.
51190 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51194 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51195 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51197 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51198 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51200 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51205 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51206 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51215 \begin_layout Description
51217 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51219 \begin_inset space ~
51223 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51225 \begin_inset space ~
51229 \begin_inset space ~
51233 \begin_inset space ~
51239 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51241 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51244 this option is set,
51245 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51246 the language switch defined in
51249 \begin_inset space ~
51254 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51255 to the document language.
51256 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51257 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51260 \begin_inset space ~
51265 or if a package resets the document language.
51266 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51267 usually should be the document language).
51268 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51269 documents start with the chosen document language.
51270 When this option is not set, the
51273 \begin_inset space ~
51278 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51280 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51283 \begin_inset space ~
51293 \begin_layout Description
51295 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51297 \begin_inset space ~
51301 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51303 \begin_inset space ~
51307 \begin_inset space ~
51311 \begin_inset space ~
51317 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51321 \begin_inset space ~
51325 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51326 Set document language explicitly
51332 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51334 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51340 \begin_inset space ~
51346 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51348 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51352 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51354 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51357 the end of the document.
51358 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51363 \paragraph_spacing single
51365 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51371 \begin_layout Description
51373 \begin_inset space ~
51377 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51379 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51383 \begin_inset space ~
51387 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51389 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51391 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51395 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51398 in a language different
51399 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51401 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51404 the document language will be
51405 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51406 marked (by default with a blue
51409 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51411 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51415 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51419 \begin_layout Description
51421 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51423 \begin_inset space ~
51427 \begin_inset space ~
51431 \begin_inset space ~
51434 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51435 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51436 switched via the operating system.
51437 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51442 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51443 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51448 \begin_layout Description
51450 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51452 \begin_inset space ~
51456 \begin_inset space ~
51459 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51460 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51465 \begin_layout Description
51467 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51469 \begin_inset space ~
51473 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51475 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51479 \begin_inset space ~
51483 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51484 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51485 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51487 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51491 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51493 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51494 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51496 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51497 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51498 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51500 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51505 \begin_layout Standard
51510 means that the cursor
51511 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51512 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51513 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51518 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51519 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51523 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51525 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51526 specific case always means: move
51530 in text (even if this means:
51536 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51537 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51538 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51539 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51540 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51552 \begin_layout Standard
51554 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51559 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51560 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51561 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51565 ) when coming from the left.
51566 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51568 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51569 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51570 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51577 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51581 \begin_layout Description
51583 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51585 \begin_inset space ~
51589 \begin_inset space ~
51592 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51593 separator alignment).
51594 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51599 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51600 (static) custom character here.
51603 \begin_layout Description
51605 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51607 \begin_inset space ~
51611 \begin_inset space ~
51614 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51620 \begin_layout Subsection
51624 \begin_layout Standard
51625 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51626 \begin_inset space ~
51630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51632 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51639 \begin_layout Section
51643 \begin_layout Subsection
51645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51647 name "subsec:General-output"
51654 \begin_layout Description
51656 \begin_inset space ~
51659 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51661 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51663 \begin_inset space ~
51669 For a detailed description see section
51671 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51676 \begin_inset space ~
51684 \begin_layout Description
51686 \begin_inset space ~
51689 Options Options for the program
51693 that is used for the export format
51698 \begin_inset space ~
51702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51704 reference "subsec:Export"
51709 Possible options are listed in the
51714 \begin_inset Newline newline
51718 \begin_inset Flex URL
51721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51723 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51733 \begin_layout Description
51735 \begin_inset space ~
51739 \begin_inset space ~
51742 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51745 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51746 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51748 \begin_inset space ~
51754 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51757 \begin_layout Description
51759 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51761 \begin_inset space ~
51765 \begin_inset Index idx
51768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51775 \begin_inset Index idx
51778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51779 Settings ! Date format
51784 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51785 \begin_inset Newline newline
51789 \begin_inset Flex URL
51792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51794 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51800 \begin_inset Newline newline
51803 For example the format
51804 \begin_inset Newline newline
51808 \begin_inset Newline newline
51811 prints the date as day/month/year.
51816 \begin_layout Description
51818 \begin_inset space ~
51822 \begin_inset space ~
51825 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51826 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51829 \begin_layout Subsection
51835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51837 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51842 \begin_inset Index idx
51845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51846 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51855 \begin_layout Description
51857 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51859 \begin_inset space ~
51867 \begin_inset space ~
51871 \begin_inset space ~
51874 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51879 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51900 are used for Cyrillic.
51901 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51914 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51916 sets up in the background.
51917 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51922 \begin_layout Description
51924 \begin_inset space ~
51928 \begin_inset space ~
51932 \begin_inset space ~
51936 \begin_inset space ~
51939 options They only have an effect when the program
51943 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51946 \begin_layout Standard
51947 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51948 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51949 manuals of the applications.
51952 \begin_layout Description
51954 \begin_inset space ~
51957 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51958 \begin_inset space ~
51962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51964 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51971 \begin_layout Description
51973 \begin_inset space ~
51976 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51977 \begin_inset space ~
51981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51983 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51990 \begin_layout Description
51992 \begin_inset space ~
51995 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51996 \begin_inset space ~
52000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52002 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52009 \begin_layout Description
52015 \begin_inset space ~
52018 command Command for the program
52020 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52023 that is described in the section
52025 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52030 Additional Features
52035 \begin_layout Standard
52036 There are additionally the following options:
52039 \begin_layout Description
52041 \begin_inset space ~
52045 \begin_inset space ~
52049 \begin_inset space ~
52053 \begin_inset space ~
52058 \begin_inset space ~
52061 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52079 to separate folders.
52080 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52082 \begin_inset Index idx
52085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52092 \begin_inset Index idx
52095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52104 \begin_layout Description
52106 \begin_inset space ~
52110 \begin_inset space ~
52114 \begin_inset space ~
52118 \begin_inset space ~
52122 \begin_inset space ~
52126 \begin_inset space ~
52129 changes Removes all manually set
52135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52136 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52138 \begin_inset space ~
52143 dialog when changing the document class.
52146 \begin_layout Section
52148 \begin_inset space ~
52152 \begin_inset Index idx
52155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52164 \begin_layout Subsection
52166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52168 name "subsec:Converters"
52173 \begin_inset Index idx
52176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52185 \begin_layout Standard
52186 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52187 from one format to another.
52188 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52189 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52196 \begin_inset space ~
52201 field and press the
52206 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52210 \begin_inset space ~
52215 drop-down list, modify the
52219 field and press the
52226 \begin_layout Standard
52229 Converter File Cache
52235 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52237 Maximum Age (in days
52240 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52241 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52244 \begin_layout Standard
52245 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52246 definition, is described in the section
52257 \begin_layout Subsection
52259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52261 name "sec:File-Formats"
52266 \begin_inset Index idx
52269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52276 \begin_inset Index idx
52279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52288 \begin_layout Standard
52289 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52299 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52302 \begin_layout Standard
52303 You can also define the
52305 Default output format
52307 that is used when you use
52309 View, Update, View Master Document
52313 Update Master Document
52319 menu or the toolbar.
52322 \begin_layout Standard
52323 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52334 \begin_layout Standard
52335 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52337 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52338 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52339 This is done by specifying a
52344 More about this is described in the section
52355 \begin_layout Chapter
52356 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52358 \begin_inset Index idx
52361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52370 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52377 \begin_layout Standard
52379 \begin_inset space ~
52383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52385 reference "tab:Units"
52389 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52390 and used in this documentation.
52393 \begin_layout Standard
52394 \begin_inset Float table
52401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52402 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52420 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52428 \begin_inset Tabular
52429 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52430 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52431 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52432 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52433 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52586 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52857 scaled point (65536
52858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52925 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53049 % of original image width
53054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53138 \begin_layout Standard
53139 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53142 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53149 \begin_layout Bibliography
53150 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53151 LatexCommand bibitem
53158 The \SpecialChar LyX
53160 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53163 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53169 \begin_inset Newline newline
53173 \begin_inset Flex URL
53176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53178 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53186 \begin_layout Bibliography
53187 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53188 LatexCommand bibitem
53189 key "latexcompanion"
53194 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53196 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53197 Companion Second Edition.
53200 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53203 \begin_layout Bibliography
53204 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53205 LatexCommand bibitem
53211 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53214 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53218 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53221 \begin_layout Bibliography
53222 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53223 LatexCommand bibitem
53232 : A Document Preparation System.
53235 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53238 \begin_layout Bibliography
53239 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53240 LatexCommand bibitem
53250 The \SpecialChar TeX
53254 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53257 \begin_layout Bibliography
53258 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53259 LatexCommand bibitem
53265 The \SpecialChar TeX
53267 \begin_inset Newline newline
53271 \begin_inset Flex URL
53274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53276 https://ctan.org/topic
53284 \begin_layout Bibliography
53285 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53286 LatexCommand bibitem
53292 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53294 \begin_inset Newline newline
53298 \begin_inset Flex URL
53301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53303 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53311 \begin_layout Bibliography
53312 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53313 LatexCommand bibitem
53320 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53322 name "Documentation"
53323 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53330 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53334 \begin_inset Newline newline
53338 \begin_inset Flex URL
53341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53343 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53351 \begin_layout Bibliography
53352 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53353 LatexCommand bibitem
53360 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53362 name "Documentation"
53363 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53368 how to use the program
53370 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53374 \begin_inset Newline newline
53378 \begin_inset Flex URL
53381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53383 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53391 \begin_layout Bibliography
53392 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53393 LatexCommand bibitem
53400 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53402 name "Documentation"
53403 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53408 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53414 \begin_inset Index idx
53417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53419 packages ! biblatex
53425 \begin_inset Newline newline
53429 \begin_inset Flex URL
53432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53434 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53442 \begin_layout Bibliography
53443 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53444 LatexCommand bibitem
53451 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53453 name "Documentation"
53454 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53459 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53465 \begin_inset Index idx
53468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53476 \begin_inset Newline newline
53480 \begin_inset Flex URL
53483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53485 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53493 \begin_layout Bibliography
53494 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53495 LatexCommand bibitem
53502 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53504 name "Documentation"
53505 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53515 \begin_inset Newline newline
53519 \begin_inset Flex URL
53522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53524 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53532 \begin_layout Bibliography
53533 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53534 LatexCommand bibitem
53535 key "makeindex-man"
53541 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53544 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53554 \begin_inset Newline newline
53558 \begin_inset Flex URL
53561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53563 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53571 \begin_layout Bibliography
53572 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53573 LatexCommand bibitem
53580 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53582 name "Documentation"
53583 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53593 \begin_inset Newline newline
53597 \begin_inset Flex URL
53600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53602 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53610 \begin_layout Bibliography
53611 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53612 LatexCommand bibitem
53619 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53621 name "Documentation"
53622 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53627 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53629 \begin_inset Newline newline
53633 \begin_inset Flex URL
53636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53638 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53646 \begin_layout Bibliography
53647 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53648 LatexCommand bibitem
53655 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53657 name "Documentation"
53658 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53663 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53669 \begin_inset Index idx
53672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53680 \begin_inset Newline newline
53684 \begin_inset Flex URL
53687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53689 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53697 \begin_layout Bibliography
53698 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53699 LatexCommand bibitem
53706 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53708 name "Documentation"
53709 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53714 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53720 \begin_inset Index idx
53723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53725 packages ! enumitem
53731 \begin_inset Newline newline
53735 \begin_inset Flex URL
53738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53740 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53748 \begin_layout Bibliography
53749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53750 LatexCommand bibitem
53757 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53759 name "Documentation"
53760 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53765 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53771 \begin_inset Index idx
53774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53776 packages ! fancyhdr
53782 \begin_inset Newline newline
53786 \begin_inset Flex URL
53789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53791 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53799 \begin_layout Bibliography
53800 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53801 LatexCommand bibitem
53808 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53810 name "Documentation"
53811 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53816 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53822 \begin_inset Index idx
53825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53827 packages ! hyperref
53833 \begin_inset Newline newline
53837 \begin_inset Flex URL
53840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53842 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53850 \begin_layout Bibliography
53851 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53852 LatexCommand bibitem
53859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53861 name "Documentation"
53862 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53867 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53873 \begin_inset Index idx
53876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53878 packages ! microtype
53884 \begin_inset Newline newline
53888 \begin_inset Flex URL
53891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53893 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53901 \begin_layout Bibliography
53902 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53903 LatexCommand bibitem
53910 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53912 name "Documentation"
53913 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53918 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53924 \begin_inset Index idx
53927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53935 \begin_inset Newline newline
53939 \begin_inset Flex URL
53942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53944 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53952 \begin_layout Bibliography
53953 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53954 LatexCommand bibitem
53961 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53963 name "Documentation"
53964 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53969 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53975 \begin_inset Index idx
53978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53980 packages ! prettyref
53986 \begin_inset Newline newline
53990 \begin_inset Flex URL
53993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53995 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54003 \begin_layout Bibliography
54004 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54005 LatexCommand bibitem
54012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54014 name "Documentation"
54015 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54020 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54026 \begin_inset Index idx
54029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54031 packages ! refstyle
54037 \begin_inset Newline newline
54041 \begin_inset Flex URL
54044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54046 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54054 \begin_layout Bibliography
54055 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54056 LatexCommand bibitem
54063 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54066 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54071 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54073 \begin_inset Newline newline
54077 \begin_inset Flex URL
54080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54082 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54090 \begin_layout Bibliography
54091 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54092 LatexCommand bibitem
54099 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54102 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54107 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54109 \begin_inset Newline newline
54113 \begin_inset Flex URL
54116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54118 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54126 \begin_layout Bibliography
54127 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54128 LatexCommand bibitem
54135 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54138 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54143 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54144 for Cyrillic languages:
54145 \begin_inset Newline newline
54149 \begin_inset Flex URL
54152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54154 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54162 \begin_layout Bibliography
54163 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54164 LatexCommand bibitem
54171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54174 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54179 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54181 \begin_inset Newline newline
54185 \begin_inset Flex URL
54188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54190 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54198 \begin_layout Bibliography
54199 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54200 LatexCommand bibitem
54207 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54210 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54215 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54217 \begin_inset Newline newline
54221 \begin_inset Flex URL
54224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54226 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54234 \begin_layout Bibliography
54235 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54236 LatexCommand bibitem
54243 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54246 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54251 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54253 \begin_inset Newline newline
54257 \begin_inset Flex URL
54260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54262 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54270 \begin_layout Standard
54271 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54305 \begin_inset Note Note
54308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54315 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54316 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54317 bibliography is the second one:
54325 \begin_layout Standard
54326 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54327 LatexCommand bibtex
54328 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54329 options "biblio/alphadin"
54336 \begin_layout Standard
54337 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54341 \begin_layout Standard
54345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54351 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54360 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54368 \begin_inset Note Note
54371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54372 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54373 \begin_inset space ~
54377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54379 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54391 \begin_layout Standard
54392 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54393 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54399 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54400 LatexCommand printindex